25.02.2015 Views

Calculux Indoor - Philips Lighting

Calculux Indoor - Philips Lighting

Calculux Indoor - Philips Lighting

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong><br />

Version 5.0<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Contents<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Contents<br />

1 Introduction 1.1<br />

1.1 <strong>Philips</strong> - your partner in lighting 1.1<br />

1.2 What <strong>Calculux</strong> does 1.1<br />

1.3 What you can do with <strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> 1.2<br />

1.4 Tailor make your indoor design 1.2<br />

1.5 Choose from a wide range of luminaires 1.2<br />

1.6 Easy luminaire positioning individually or as a group 1.3<br />

1.7 Symmetry lighting installation 1.3<br />

1.8 Graphical manipulation of generated luminaires and/or aiming positions 1.3<br />

1.9 Calculation Grids 1.3<br />

1.10 Switching Modes 1.4<br />

1.11 Light Regulation Factor (LRF) 1.4<br />

1.12 Save money by optimising cost-effectiveness 1.4<br />

1.13 See your lighting design develop on screen 1.4<br />

1.14 Impress your customers with attractive reports 1.4<br />

1.15 Installation and operating platform 1.5<br />

2 Getting Started 2.1<br />

2.1 Installing the program 2.1<br />

2.2 Installing the database 2.1<br />

2.3 What is new in <strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> 5.0 2.2<br />

2.4 Installing other report languages 2.2<br />

2.5 File structure 2.3<br />

2.6 Environment settings and preferences 2.3<br />

3 Background Information 3.1<br />

3.1 Project Info and Vignette file 3.1<br />

3.1.1 Project Info.....................................................................................................................................................3.1<br />

3.1.2 Vignette file....................................................................................................................................................3.1<br />

3.2 Room Characteristics 3.2<br />

3.2.1 Surfaces: dimensions and reflectance...............................................................................................3.2<br />

3.2.2 Interreflection accuracy...........................................................................................................................3.2<br />

3.2.3 Quick Estimate.............................................................................................................................................3.3<br />

3.2.4 UF Method.....................................................................................................................................................3.3<br />

3.2.5 Zones................................................................................................................................................................3.4<br />

3.2.6 Room Grids...................................................................................................................................................3.5<br />

3.3 Application Fields 3.6<br />

3.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

3.3.2 Connections with calculation Grids..................................................................................................3.7<br />

3.4 Luminaire Photometric Data 3.8<br />

3.4.1 Luminaire Database...................................................................................................................................3.8<br />

3.4.2 ASCII data file...............................................................................................................................................3.8<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Contents<br />

3.5 Luminaire Positioning and Orientation 3.9<br />

3.5.1 Luminaire Positioning ...............................................................................................................................3.9<br />

XYZ-coordinates........................................................................................................................................3.9<br />

C-γ coordinate system.............................................................................................................................3.9<br />

3.5.2 Luminaire Orientation...........................................................................................................................3.10<br />

Aiming types...............................................................................................................................................3.10<br />

Luminaire orientation order ..............................................................................................................3.12<br />

Conversion of Aiming types..............................................................................................................3.13<br />

Selecting Aiming Presentation types.............................................................................................3.14<br />

Aiming offset (Floodlights)..................................................................................................................3.15<br />

3.5.3 Number of luminaires per position (Luminaire Quantity)................................................3.16<br />

3.6 Individual Luminaires 3.17<br />

3.6.1 General .........................................................................................................................................................3.17<br />

3.6.2 Luminaire Definition...............................................................................................................................3.17<br />

Luminaire List.............................................................................................................................................3.17<br />

3.6.3 View................................................................................................................................................................3.18<br />

3.7 Luminaire Arrangements 3.19<br />

3.7.1 General .........................................................................................................................................................3.19<br />

Arrangement Definition.......................................................................................................................3.19<br />

Luminaire Definition...............................................................................................................................3.20<br />

Luminaire List.............................................................................................................................................3.20<br />

View................................................................................................................................................................3.20<br />

3.7.2 Room Block Arrangement..................................................................................................................3.20<br />

Arrangement Definition.......................................................................................................................3.20<br />

Luminaire Definition...............................................................................................................................3.22<br />

3.7.3 Block Arrangement.................................................................................................................................3.23<br />

Arrangement Definition.......................................................................................................................3.23<br />

Luminaire Definition...............................................................................................................................3.25<br />

3.7.4 Polar Arrangement .................................................................................................................................3.26<br />

Arrangement Definition.......................................................................................................................3.26<br />

Luminaire Definition...............................................................................................................................3.28<br />

3.7.5 Line Arrangement ...................................................................................................................................3.30<br />

Arrangement Definition.......................................................................................................................3.30<br />

Luminaire Definition...............................................................................................................................3.33<br />

3.7.6 Free Arrangement...................................................................................................................................3.34<br />

Arrangement Definition.......................................................................................................................3.34<br />

Luminaire Definition...............................................................................................................................3.34<br />

3.7.7 Ungrouping a luminaire arrangement...........................................................................................3.35<br />

3.7.8 Convert into a Free Arrangement .................................................................................................3.35<br />

3.8 Symmetry 3.36<br />

3.8.1 General .........................................................................................................................................................3.36<br />

3.8.2 X-Symmetry ...............................................................................................................................................3.38<br />

3.8.3 Y-Symmetry................................................................................................................................................3.38<br />

3.8.4 XY-Symmetry............................................................................................................................................3.39<br />

3.9 Grids 3.40<br />

3.9.1 General .........................................................................................................................................................3.40<br />

3.9.2 Generated grids........................................................................................................................................3.40<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> standard grids ........................................................................................................................3.40<br />

Room Surfaces..........................................................................................................................................3.41<br />

NEN standard grids................................................................................................................................3.41<br />

DIN standard grids .................................................................................................................................3.42<br />

CIBSE standard grids..............................................................................................................................3.42<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Contents<br />

3.9.3 User defined (Free added) grids .....................................................................................................3.43<br />

Size and position of a grid: points A, B and C .........................................................................3.43<br />

Calculation points in a grid.................................................................................................................3.45<br />

Default side.................................................................................................................................................3.46<br />

Grid coupling .............................................................................................................................................3.46<br />

Normal vector of a grid.......................................................................................................................3.50<br />

Presentation of results ..........................................................................................................................3.50<br />

3.10 Shapes 3.52<br />

3.10.1 Pre-defined shapes..................................................................................................................................3.52<br />

3.10.2 User-defined shapes...............................................................................................................................3.52<br />

Set of points...............................................................................................................................................3.53<br />

Rectangle......................................................................................................................................................3.53<br />

Polygon .........................................................................................................................................................3.54<br />

Arc...................................................................................................................................................................3.55<br />

3.10.3 Symmetry.....................................................................................................................................................3.56<br />

3.11 <strong>Lighting</strong> control (Switching Modes / Light Regulation Factor) 3.57<br />

3.11.1 Switching Modes......................................................................................................................................3.57<br />

3.11.2 Light Regulation Factor (LRF) ...........................................................................................................3.57<br />

3.12 Drawings 3.58<br />

3.13 Light-technical Calculations 3.59<br />

3.13.1 Plane Illuminance......................................................................................................................................3.59<br />

3.13.2 Glare...............................................................................................................................................................3.62<br />

UGR................................................................................................................................................................3.63<br />

3.13.3 Indirect contribution ..............................................................................................................................3.65<br />

3.13.4 Calculating the numbers of luminaires needed.......................................................................3.65<br />

Quick Estimation......................................................................................................................................3.65<br />

Utilisation Factor (UF)...........................................................................................................................3.66<br />

Uniformity Check....................................................................................................................................3.67<br />

3.13.5 Quality Figures ..........................................................................................................................................3.67<br />

Minimum ......................................................................................................................................................3.67<br />

Maximum.....................................................................................................................................................3.67<br />

Minimum/maximum...............................................................................................................................3.67<br />

Minimum/average....................................................................................................................................3.67<br />

3.14 Report Setup 3.68<br />

3.15 Cost Calculations 3.69<br />

3.15.1 Total Investment......................................................................................................................................3.69<br />

3.15.2 Annual costs...............................................................................................................................................3.70<br />

3.16 Maintenance Factor/New Value Factor 3.72<br />

3.16.1 General Project Maintenance Factor............................................................................................3.72<br />

3.16.2 Luminaire Type Maintenance Factor.............................................................................................3.72<br />

3.16.3 Lamp Maintenance Factor ..................................................................................................................3.72<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Contents<br />

Appendix<br />

A1<br />

My First Project<br />

Contains a step-by-step tutorial that takes you through the process of creating an <strong>Indoor</strong><br />

field lighting project.<br />

A2<br />

My Second Project<br />

Contains a step-by-step tutorial that takes you through the process of adding furniture and<br />

additional lighting to the indoor lighting installation.<br />

A3<br />

My Third Project<br />

Contains a step-by-step tutorial that takes you through the process of creating a director<br />

room, with furniture and additional lighting.<br />

A4<br />

My First Project printed report<br />

Contains a printed report of your first project. When you complete and print out My First<br />

Project this is what you should get.<br />

A5<br />

My Second Project printed report<br />

Contains a printed report of your second project. When you complete and print out My<br />

Second Project this is what you should get.<br />

A6<br />

My Third Project printed report<br />

Contains a printed report of your third project. When you com-plete and print out My<br />

Third Project this is what you should get.<br />

A7<br />

Index<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 1<br />

Introduction<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 1 Introduction<br />

1 Introduction<br />

This chapter describes the main features of <strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> and explains what you can<br />

expect from the package.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> is a software tool which can help lighting designers select and evaluate<br />

lighting systems for office and industrial applications. Speed, ease of use and versatility are<br />

features of the package from <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong>, the world's leading supplier of lighting<br />

systems. Running under the Microsoft Windows operating system, <strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong><br />

includes even more options than its popular predecessor, <strong>Calculux</strong> for DOS.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> is part of the <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Calculux</strong> line, covering indoor, area and road<br />

applications.<br />

1.1 <strong>Philips</strong> - your partner in lighting<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong>, established over a century ago, has vast experience in helping customers<br />

to select the optimum solutions for their lighting applications, in terms of quality,<br />

performance and economy.<br />

Our customer partnership philosophy means that we can support you from the planning,<br />

design and commissioning of projects, right through to realisation and aftersales support.<br />

This philosophy maximises cost-efficiency by ensuring the ability to choose the most<br />

suitable equipment for your application.<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> Design and Application Centres situated throughout the world offer<br />

extensive consultancy, training and demonstration services. Our lighting specialists can<br />

recommend existing solutions or develop new tailor made solutions for your application.<br />

Because <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> is the leading supplier, you're assured of getting the best support<br />

available.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> is part of that support. For consultants, wholesalers and installers wishing to<br />

develop lighting designs, it's the ideal tool; saving time and effort, providing the most<br />

advanced lighting solutions available and guaranteeing satisfied customers.<br />

1.2 What <strong>Calculux</strong> does<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> is a very flexible system which offers lighting designers a wide range of options:<br />

• You can use the package to simulate real lighting situations and analyse different lighting<br />

installations until you find the solutions which suits your technical as well as your<br />

financial and aesthetic requirements best.<br />

• <strong>Calculux</strong> uses luminaires from an extensive <strong>Philips</strong> database and photometric data which is<br />

stored in the <strong>Philips</strong> Phillum external formats. Additionally other luminaire data formats<br />

can be imported (CIBSE/TM14, IES, EULUMDAT and LTLI).<br />

• Simple menus, logical dialogue boxes and a step by step approach help you to find the<br />

most efficient and cost-effective solutions for your lighting applications.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 1.1 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 1 Introduction<br />

1.3 What you can do with <strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong><br />

• Perform lighting calculations (including direct, indirect, total and average illuminance)<br />

within orthogonal rooms;<br />

• Predict financial implications including energy, investment, lamp and maintenance costs<br />

for different luminaire arrangements;<br />

• Select luminaires from an extensive <strong>Philips</strong> database or from specially formatted files for<br />

luminaires from other suppliers;<br />

• Specify room dimensions, luminaire types, maintenance factors, interreflection accuracy,<br />

calculation grids and calculation types;<br />

• Compile reports displaying results in text and graphical formats;<br />

• Support Switching modes and Light regulation factors;<br />

• Support multiple languages.<br />

The logical steps used for project specification save you time and effort, while the report<br />

facility gives you the opportunity to keep permanent records of the results.<br />

1.4 Tailor make your indoor design<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> is designed for use with six-sided orthogonal rooms. The dimensions of<br />

the room and the reflectance of each surface are entered by the user. Calculation grids can<br />

be defined anywhere in the room. You can also enter the maintenance factor and the<br />

required interreflection accuracy. These values will be used in all subsequent calculations.<br />

1.5 Choose from a wide range of luminaires<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> is supplied with an extensive <strong>Philips</strong> database which includes the most advanced<br />

luminaires. For each luminaire you can view luminaire data, including the type of<br />

distributor, lamp type, output flux efficiency factors and power consumption. The light<br />

distribution can be shown in a Polar, Cartesian or Isocandela diagram, together with the<br />

luminaire quality figures.<br />

Apart from the <strong>Philips</strong> database, the following other well known luminaire data formats<br />

from other suppliers can be used in <strong>Calculux</strong>:<br />

• CIBSE/TM14;<br />

• EULUMDAT;<br />

• IES;<br />

• LTLI.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 1.2 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 1 Introduction<br />

1.6 Easy luminaire positioning individually or as a group<br />

After you've made your luminaire selection, you can position and orientate luminaires<br />

individually or in groups, anywhere in a room. Luminaire data, including the type of<br />

distributor, lamp type, output flux and power consumption can be viewed at any time.<br />

In many lighting designs luminaires are often grouped in arrangements such as blocks,<br />

lines or circles. <strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> contains an option to define a number of arrangements.<br />

The position of the luminaires in such an arrangement is controlled by the arrangement<br />

rule but the orientation of each luminaire within an arrangement can be altered. It's even<br />

possible to free the luminaires positions so that they're no longer connected via the<br />

arrangement rule. This feature proves very useful e.g. when in a preliminary design a<br />

number of luminaires are placed on a line, but in the final stage one of the luminaires in<br />

the line doesn't entirely fulfil the line arrangement rule.<br />

1.7 Symmetry lighting installation<br />

Many designs contain a symmetric lighting installation. This simplifies luminaire<br />

arrangement entries where one or more of the luminaires have the same orientation.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> offers the possibility to include symmetry in the installation or a part of the<br />

installation.<br />

1.8 Graphical manipulation of generated luminaires and/or<br />

aiming positions<br />

Having defined luminaires as individuals or in arrangements, <strong>Calculux</strong> enables graphical<br />

manipulation (with a mouse) of the position and orientation of the luminaires.<br />

Graphical manipulation operates with the same arrangement rules.<br />

1.9 Calculation Grids<br />

After setting the luminaire arrangement, you're able to choose a preset grid or define your<br />

own for which the lighting calculations will be carried out. For example you wish to know<br />

if a particular combination of luminaires provides a sufficient level of light for a secretary's<br />

desk.<br />

By defining the desktop as a grid, the illuminance can be calculated and the results viewed<br />

on screen or printed. There's even a possibility to specify the number of points on the<br />

desktop at which the illuminance is calculated. On the other hand, if you don't want to<br />

define your own grid, frequently used grids corresponding to the room's six surfaces and<br />

the working plane are predefined to save you time.<br />

In many situations the indirect illuminance can be calculated by considering the room<br />

surfaces as diffuse sources which reflect the same amount of light at every point. When<br />

more accuracy is required, <strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> allows you to divide the room surfaces into<br />

cells which may reflect varying amounts of light. Up to 800 cells can be defined to give an<br />

extremely high level of accuracy.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> also provides a quick estimate of the number of luminaires of a particular<br />

type needed to provide a certain level of illuminance using the Utilisation Factor method.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 1.3 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 1 Introduction<br />

1.10 Switching Modes<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> enables you to develop a lighting design in different switching modes.<br />

You can first generate a design for a conference room for video presentation and then by<br />

adding luminaires go on to generate a design for a conference situation.<br />

1.11 Light Regulation Factor (LRF)<br />

This <strong>Calculux</strong> option enables you to dim luminaires or luminaire arrangements<br />

1.12 Save money by optimising cost-effectiveness<br />

Cost is a major consideration when specifying a lighting installation. <strong>Calculux</strong> provides a<br />

breakdown of the costs you can expect to incur with a particular installation, both in terms<br />

of initial investment and annual running costs. Thus it's possible to support you in the<br />

decision making process by comparing the cost-effectiveness of different lighting<br />

arrangements.<br />

1.13 See your lighting design develop on screen<br />

A special view menu is provided to enable you to monitor the development of your project<br />

on screen. A 3-D as well as a number of 2-D project overviews can be displayed on screen.<br />

All overviews allow graphical manipulation of the luminaires (position and orientation).<br />

The view facility can also be used to study the calculated results in text and graphic format.<br />

Tables listing the calculated values are displayed. The view facility can also provide<br />

isotropic contours, mountain plots and graphic tables of the results.<br />

1.14 Impress your customers with attractive reports<br />

When you've finished a project you're able to generate attractive reports giving the results<br />

of the calculations. All you have to do is use the menu to select the elements which you<br />

wish to include in your report and they will be added automatically.<br />

For example, you can incorporate:<br />

• A table of contents;<br />

• 2-D and 3-D project overviews;<br />

• Summary;<br />

• Luminaire information (including Polar or Cartesian diagram);<br />

• Detailed information about the calculation results (in textual table, graphical presentation<br />

and/or Iso contour);<br />

• Financial data.<br />

It's also possible to add supplementary text. A convenient feature if you wish to comment<br />

on or draw conclusions from the results presented in the report.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 1.4 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 1 Introduction<br />

1.15 Installation and operating platform<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> for indoor, area and road applications are supplied with the installation program<br />

and database.<br />

The following target operating platform is recommended:<br />

• CPU: Pentium 350;<br />

• RAM:<br />

128 Mb;<br />

• Hard disk: 100 Mb free disk space;<br />

• Operating system: Windows 98 or later;<br />

• Other:<br />

SVGA monitor, mouse, Windows supported graphics printer or plotter.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 1.5 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 1 Introduction<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 1.6 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 2<br />

Getting Started<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 2 Getting Started<br />

2 Getting Started<br />

This section tells you which steps you should follow to install <strong>Calculux</strong> on your personal<br />

computer.<br />

The installation procedure of <strong>Calculux</strong> consists of two steps:<br />

2.1 Installing the program<br />

In order to install <strong>Calculux</strong> correctly, please stop all other applications before starting the<br />

installation.<br />

To install the program:<br />

• Start Windows.<br />

• Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.<br />

• From the Windows Start menu, select Run.<br />

• When the Run dialogue box appears, click Browse.<br />

• On your CD-ROM drive, select setup.<br />

• Click OK.<br />

• Follow the instructions on screen.<br />

(You can also use Windows Write to read the Readme file, which is stored in the <strong>Calculux</strong><br />

directory.<br />

Uninstalling the package:<br />

• From the Windows Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel.<br />

• Double click the Add/Remove Programs icon.<br />

• Select <strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong>, click on the Add/Remove button and follow the instructions.<br />

2.2 Installing the database<br />

To install the database, you need the CD labeled 'Database'.<br />

• Start Windows.<br />

• Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.<br />

• From the Windows Start menu, select Run.<br />

• When the Run dialogue box appears, click Browse.<br />

• On your CD-ROM drive, select setup.<br />

• Click OK.<br />

• Follow the instructions on screen.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 2.1 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 2 Getting Started<br />

2.3 What is new in <strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> 5.0<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> 5.0 is an upgrade of <strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.0. Major new and enhanced<br />

features are:<br />

• Import luminaire data formats from other suppliers (CIBSE/TM14, EULUMDAT, IES and<br />

LTLI);<br />

• Copy and paste feature for table input data;<br />

• Copy graphical output to the clipboard to be used in other programs;<br />

• Generate shapes for the Ice-hockey field;<br />

• In/outbound polygon shapes;<br />

• Shape definition in xy coordinates;<br />

• Draw luminaire object with geometrical or optical luminaire dimensions;<br />

• Use preferred lamp colour from luminaire database.<br />

(Project files (*.CIN) are upwards compatible. They can be used in the new releases.<br />

However, after saving, they cannot be used anymore in previous releases.<br />

2.4 Installing other report languages<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> supports run-time selection of the report language.<br />

To do so, each language requires an additional language file to be installed in the<br />

application folder of <strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong>.<br />

All available report languages are installed automatically during installation.<br />

When an extra language must be installed, the required file (named CIN_*.RPT) must be<br />

copied into this folder (e.g. C:\Program Files\<strong>Calculux</strong>\<strong>Indoor</strong>).<br />

(In Windows 98 it can be necessary to enable Multilanguage Support:<br />

• Choose Add/Remove Programs in the Control Panel.<br />

• Go to Windows Setup and enable Multilanguage Support.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 2.2 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 2 Getting Started<br />

2.5 File structure<br />

During the installation procedure a number of directories will be created. The default<br />

directory structure, which should be created during the installation of the program and the<br />

database, is described below.<br />

C: \PROGRAM FILES\CALCULUX<br />

\INDOOR<br />

\DB<br />

\MULTLANG<br />

\PHILLUM<br />

\PROJECT<br />

\VIGNETTE<br />

• In the INDOOR directory, the program and its necessary files are stored.<br />

• In the DB directory, the database is installed.<br />

• In the MULTLANG directory, the different language versions of the package (if available)<br />

are stored.<br />

• In the PHILLUM directory, the individual photometric data files, not available in the<br />

database, (i.e. Phillum) are stored. The program is supplied with a few test Phillum files.<br />

• In the PROJECT directory, the projects can be stored.<br />

• In the VIGNETTE directory, the files (Vignette files) containing the company names and<br />

addresses are stored. The program is supplied with a few test vignettes.<br />

For more detailed information relating to each of the above directories, use the Readme<br />

icon.<br />

2.6 Environment settings and preferences<br />

When the program and database are installed successfully, you can start the application<br />

and use the Environment Options in the Option menu to set the environment directories<br />

and database settings.<br />

The environment directories and database settings can be checked at any time.<br />

You are now ready to start developing your first lighting project.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 2.3 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 2 Getting Started<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 2.4 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3<br />

Background<br />

Information<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3 Background Information<br />

This chapter describes in detail the background principles used in <strong>Calculux</strong>.<br />

3.1 Project Info and Vignette file<br />

3.1.1 Project Info<br />

When you start a new project in <strong>Calculux</strong>, it can be beneficial to enter summary<br />

information. This can include remarks and statistics about the project, e.g. name, date and<br />

designer, as well as customer details.<br />

3.1.2 Vignette file<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> enables you to include details about yourself and your company in your reports.<br />

The information will be printed on the cover page of the reports and can be used for<br />

reference at any time.<br />

This provides the customer with contact details, should they need to consult you over the<br />

contents of the report.<br />

If you create what is called a Vignette file you can save the information to a disk.<br />

This eliminates the need to enter the same company information every time you open a<br />

new project. You can simply select the Vignette file to be included in your next project.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.1 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.2 Room Characteristics<br />

3.2.1 Surfaces: dimensions and reflectance<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> assumes that the room in which the luminaires are to be positioned is<br />

rectangular. Rooms are defined by using an XYZ-coordinate system in which the width is<br />

parallel to the x-axis, the length is parallel to the y-axis and the height is parallel to the z-<br />

axis.<br />

For positioning of the room the X and Y coordinates of the front bottom left corner of the<br />

room can be entered (P) you can press the 'Centre' button to place the centre of the room<br />

in the origin of the coordinate system O (0, 0, 0). This last option can be usefull, for<br />

example, when you want to apply symmetry.<br />

Z<br />

Y<br />

O (o,o,o)<br />

P ref<br />

C<br />

A<br />

B<br />

X<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

= width<br />

= length<br />

= height<br />

3.2.2 Interreflection accuracy<br />

Each of the room's six surfaces is considered to have a uniform reflectance. The<br />

interreflection accuracy you set obviously depends on how important interreflection is to<br />

your lighting design. If you choose a higher level of accuracy each room surface is divided<br />

into a number of subsurfaces (cells; max. 800) at which the lighting calculations will be<br />

performed. This requires longer calculation times.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.2 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.2.3 Quick Estimate<br />

If you wish you can enter a value for the Required Illuminance Level of the room in the<br />

Quick Estimate field of the Room dialogue box, e.g. enter "500lux." Later when you select a<br />

luminaire for your lighting design using the Add Room Block Arrangement dialogue box,<br />

an estimation of the number of this luminaires needed is provided. This estimation is done<br />

according to the CIE UF method.<br />

(More detailed information about 'Quick estimate' can be found in chapter 'Lighttechnical<br />

Calculations', section 'Quick Estimation'.<br />

3.2.4 UF Method<br />

When you add a luminaire from a database or PHILLUM file, the number of luminaires<br />

needed to provide the required illuminance level as entered in the Room dialogue box is<br />

automatically entered and displayed.<br />

The calculation is performed using the so called Utilisation Factor (UF) method described<br />

in CIE reports 40 and 52. If you click on the Generate button and you have entered a value<br />

for the 'number of luminaires needed' which is lower then the requested one, the program<br />

once more positions them according to the UF method. If no solution can be found,<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> informs you, i.e. you'll receive a warning that the number of luminaires<br />

doesn't fit in the room.<br />

In some cases the database contains information about the maximum advisable spacing to<br />

height ratios of luminaires, in order to provide uniformity. If the number of luminaires<br />

calculated using the UF method doesn't comply with this ratio, then <strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> adds<br />

extra luminaires until it does.<br />

For example, suppose that by accident you've chosen a powerful industrial luminaire for<br />

use in an office. The UF method tells you that the number of luminaires needed to provide<br />

the required average illuminance level is 1. When you choose generate the view panel will<br />

display 4 luminaires necessary to comply with the spacing to height ratio. This would be<br />

very inefficient, so another luminaire should be chosen.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.3 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.2.5 Zones<br />

By using the Zones option and entering a value for the Border Zones you're able to define<br />

a working plane smaller than the room floor. Entering a value for a zone (left, right, front<br />

or back) will specify the distance between one of the walls and the working plane.<br />

The previous generated working plane calculations are now automatically spread over the<br />

reduced working plane.<br />

D<br />

A<br />

W<br />

B<br />

C<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

W<br />

= border zone left<br />

= border zone right<br />

= border zone front<br />

= border zone back<br />

= working plane<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.4 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.2.6 Room Grids<br />

To perform lighting calculations <strong>Calculux</strong> uses grids. A grid is a set of points in a 2<br />

dimensional plane, at which the lighting calculations will be carried out. A grid must<br />

always be rectangular in shape and can be in any plane in space (horizontal, vertical or<br />

sloping).<br />

The size, position and the number of grid points can be specified by the user. Some special<br />

plane grids on walls and working planes<br />

(= Room Grids) will automatically be generated according to a standard. A standard<br />

defines the minimum number of grid points that is used for the lighting calculations.<br />

It also defines how these grid points are divided over the application area.<br />

The following standards are available:<br />

• <strong>Calculux</strong>;<br />

• NEN;<br />

• DIN;<br />

• CIBSE.<br />

(More detailed information about (Room) grids and the grid standards can be found in<br />

chapter 'Grids'.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.5 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.3 Application Fields<br />

3.3.1 General<br />

In <strong>Calculux</strong> an application field is represented by a 2-Dimensional rectangular shape.<br />

Application fields can be used to graphically mark the area of interest for lighting<br />

calculations. <strong>Calculux</strong> includes a number of different applications.<br />

To differentiate between the types, they contain zero or more predefined lines and/or<br />

markings that are associated with the different applications. The outlines of the built-in<br />

sports fields have already been drawn, requiring only the name, dimensions and centre<br />

position to be entered. You can choose from:<br />

• Tennis Court;<br />

• Basketball Ground;<br />

• Volleyball Ground;<br />

• <strong>Indoor</strong> hockey Field;<br />

• Ice hockey Field;<br />

• Five-a-side football Pitch;<br />

• Handball Court;<br />

• Korfball Court;<br />

• Badminton Court;<br />

• Squash Court;<br />

• Table Tennis Table;<br />

• General Field.<br />

In <strong>Calculux</strong>, for each type of application field the default dimensions and grid settings can<br />

be entered. This allows local standards to be set, limiting the input requirements of the<br />

designer. Upon selection, <strong>Calculux</strong> automatically draws the application field using the<br />

default values. <strong>Calculux</strong> also generates a grid and a surface illuminance calculation on this<br />

grid. You are then free to change the dimensions, if necessary, to suit your personal design<br />

requirements.<br />

The general application field is an empty rectangular field. It can be used when you wish to<br />

perform calculations for an application not included in the above list. A general field<br />

operates like any other application field. You can connect a grid to a general field, ensuring<br />

that any changes made to the field parameters automatically change the grid parameters.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.6 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

The following figure shows a basketball ground (dimensions 15 x 28 m.) with a calculation<br />

grid (grid spacing is 2m.) connected to it.<br />

Y<br />

0<br />

0<br />

X<br />

3.3.2 Connections with calculation Grids<br />

A calculation grid usually lies within an application field. <strong>Calculux</strong> enables you to connect<br />

a grid to an application field, ensuring that any changes made to the field parameters<br />

automatically change the grid parameters. You can set a calculation grid for each<br />

application field.<br />

For an example demonstrating this feature see chapter 'Grids', section 'Grid Coupling'.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.7 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.4 Luminaire Photometric Data<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> can retrieve luminaire photometric data from two different sources:<br />

• A luminaire database;<br />

• A specially formatted ASCII data file.<br />

3.4.1 Luminaire Database<br />

The luminaire database is supplied with <strong>Calculux</strong> and contains a wide range of luminaires<br />

from your supplier.<br />

The luminaire database, of which you want to select your project luminaires, can be<br />

selected in the Select Database dialogue box.<br />

When a database is selected, luminaire types for a particular application area can be<br />

selected in the Application Area dialogue box. For each luminaire, details about housing,<br />

light distributors, colour, lamps and luminous flux intensity are presented on screen in a<br />

logical, step-by-step way so that choosing a suitable luminaire for an application is easy.<br />

The default luminaire database and directory in which the luminaire database is stored is set<br />

in the Database tab of the Environment Options dialogue box (Options menu). If you wish to<br />

extend the range of luminaires you can save more than one database in this directory.<br />

3.4.2 ASCII data file<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> is supplied with an extensive <strong>Philips</strong> luminaire database.<br />

New <strong>Philips</strong> luminaires that are not yet available in the database are sometimes supplied in<br />

specially formatted ASCII data file, the PHILips LUMinaires data format (PHILLUM).<br />

Apart from the <strong>Philips</strong> database and the PHILLUM format, <strong>Calculux</strong> allows you to use<br />

photometric data from other suppliers.<br />

The following other well known formats can be used in <strong>Calculux</strong>:<br />

• CIBSE/TM14;<br />

• EULUMDAT;<br />

• IES;<br />

• LTLI.<br />

Luminaire files are stored in the default directory. You can set the location of the default<br />

directory in the Directories tab of the Environment Options dialogue box (Options menu).<br />

(The interpretation of the above luminaire formats can differ. You should pay attention<br />

when using them.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.8 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.5 Luminaire Positioning and Orientation<br />

3.5.1 Luminaire Positioning<br />

XYZ-coordinates<br />

To position a luminaire, <strong>Calculux</strong> requires<br />

the use of the (three dimensional) coordinate<br />

system XYZ. The X L<br />

Y L<br />

Z L<br />

coordinates position<br />

the centre of the luminaire in relation to the<br />

origin of the coordinate system.<br />

The arrow in the following illustration<br />

indicates the centre of the light emitting area<br />

of the luminaire and represents the main axis<br />

of that particular luminaire.<br />

Z L<br />

Z<br />

X L<br />

270˚<br />

90˚<br />

0˚<br />

Y L<br />

180˚<br />

Y<br />

X<br />

C-γ coordinate system<br />

Each luminaire is given its own luminous intensity coordinate system,<br />

in order to provide information on its luminous flux distribution.<br />

In general, the C-γ coordinate system is used. To create the required luminous flux<br />

distribution in your design you'll need to define a new orientation for the luminaire.<br />

This is done by rotating and/or tilting the luminaire in relation to its (local) coordinate<br />

system.<br />

For indoor fluorescent luminaires the longitudinal axis of the lamp is called the<br />

C=90°/C=270° axis. The lateral axis of the lamp (perpendicular to the longitudinal axis) is<br />

called the C=0°/C=180° axis. For luminaires with an unusual shape, such as those used in<br />

outdoor applications, the mounting bracket is usually regarded as a reference which<br />

corresponds to the C=270° axis. The vertical axis of the lamp is normally called the<br />

γ=0°/γ=180° axis.<br />

The following illustrations display the C-γ coordinate system for the three main luminaire<br />

types, being street, indoor and floodlighting.<br />

C=180˚ γ=180˚ C=0˚<br />

C=270˚ C=90˚<br />

C=60˚<br />

C=30˚<br />

C=180˚ γ=180˚ C=0˚<br />

C=270˚ C=90˚<br />

C=60˚<br />

C=30˚<br />

γ=0˚<br />

γ=0˚<br />

Street<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong><br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.9 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

C=180˚ γ=180˚ C=0˚<br />

C=270˚ C=90˚<br />

C=60˚<br />

C=30˚<br />

γ=0˚<br />

Flood<br />

3.5.2 Luminaire Orientation<br />

Aiming types<br />

To determine the orientation of a luminaire you can use either:<br />

• Aiming by defining a fixed point (XYZ);<br />

• Aiming by defining fixed angles (RBA).<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> enables you to aim the luminaires with RBA aiming type and view the generated<br />

aiming point by switching from RBA aiming to XYZ aiming (and vice versa).<br />

XYZ aiming<br />

If XYZ aiming is used, the luminaire orientation is determined by defining its aiming<br />

point. This is the point (P) towards which the main axis (γ=0°) is directed, see figure below.<br />

The position of the aiming point P (X p<br />

, Y p<br />

, Z p<br />

) is related to the global coordinate system.<br />

• α = Rot<br />

• β = Tilt90<br />

Z<br />

Y<br />

Z L<br />

180˚<br />

90˚<br />

Y L Y P<br />

270˚ 270˚<br />

270˚<br />

0˚<br />

Z P<br />

P<br />

β<br />

α<br />

X L X P<br />

X<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.10 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

RBA aiming<br />

The luminaire is aimed (orientated) by defining fixed angles for Rot (around the vertical<br />

axis), Tilt90 (around the C=0°/C=180° axis) and Tilt0 (around the C=90°/C=270° axis).<br />

Rotation (Rot)<br />

If you wish to change the angle of rotation of the luminaire about its vertical axis, you<br />

need to enter a value in degrees for the variable 'Rot'. This value can be positive or<br />

negative.<br />

For example Rot = 45°:<br />

Z<br />

γ=180˚<br />

C=270˚ C=90˚<br />

C=180˚<br />

C=0˚<br />

γ=0˚<br />

Y<br />

45˚<br />

X<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.11 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Tilt90<br />

If you wish to change the angle of rotation of a luminaire about its C=0°/C=180° axis, you<br />

need to enter a value in degrees for the variable Tilt90. This value can be positive or<br />

negative.<br />

For example Tilt90 = 30°:<br />

γ=180˚<br />

Z<br />

C=90˚<br />

C=180˚<br />

30˚<br />

C=0˚<br />

C=270˚<br />

γ=0˚<br />

Y<br />

X<br />

Tilt0<br />

If you wish to change the angle of rotation of a luminaire about its C=90°/C=270° axis,<br />

you need to enter a value in degrees for the variable Tilt0. This value can be positive or<br />

negative.<br />

For example Tilt0 = 30°:<br />

Z<br />

C=270˚<br />

γ=180˚<br />

C=0˚<br />

C=180˚<br />

C=90˚<br />

Y<br />

γ=0˚<br />

30˚<br />

X<br />

Luminaire orientation order<br />

When specifying values for RBA aiming <strong>Calculux</strong> uses the following specification order:<br />

• Rot;<br />

• Tilt90;<br />

• Tilt0.<br />

Extra attention must be paid, because the order in which the variables will be processed is<br />

of great influence on the resulting orientation.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.12 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

For example if the following sequence of processing is executed for a luminaire:<br />

• 90° rotation about the vertical axis (Rot=90°);<br />

• 90° rotation about the C=0°/C=180° axis (Tilt90=90°);<br />

• 90° rotation about the C=90°/C=270° axis (Tilt0=90°).<br />

The result of the above order of processing gives the following orientation:<br />

Z<br />

Z<br />

Z<br />

Z<br />

270˚<br />

0˚<br />

γ=180˚<br />

180˚<br />

90˚<br />

180˚<br />

270˚<br />

γ=180˚<br />

90˚<br />

0˚<br />

180˚<br />

90˚<br />

0˚<br />

γ=180˚ γ=0˚<br />

270˚<br />

γ=180˚ γ=0˚<br />

0˚<br />

90˚<br />

270˚<br />

180˚<br />

Y<br />

γ=0˚<br />

Y<br />

γ=0˚<br />

Y<br />

Y<br />

X<br />

X<br />

X<br />

X<br />

Consider this against the following order of processing:<br />

• 90° rotation about the vertical axis (Rot=90°);<br />

• 90° rotation about the C=90°/C=270° axis (Tilt0=90°);<br />

• 90° rotation about the C=0°/C=180° axis (Tilt90=90°).<br />

This will result in the following orientation:<br />

Z<br />

Z<br />

Z<br />

Z<br />

270˚<br />

γ=180˚<br />

180˚<br />

180˚<br />

γ=180˚<br />

90˚<br />

γ=180˚<br />

0˚<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

0˚<br />

γ=0˚<br />

0˚<br />

90˚<br />

270˚<br />

0˚<br />

270˚<br />

180˚<br />

γ=0˚<br />

γ=180˚<br />

180˚<br />

270˚<br />

Y<br />

γ=0˚<br />

Y<br />

γ=0˚<br />

Y<br />

Y<br />

X<br />

X<br />

X<br />

X<br />

Conversion of Aiming types<br />

Conversion from RBA aiming to XYZ aiming<br />

The XYZ coordinates of the aiming points are locked on the aiming plane. Conversion<br />

from RBA-aiming to XYZ-aiming is only possible when the Tilt0 of the luminaire is 0°.<br />

This restriction is included to prevent the loss of orientation information. The XYZ<br />

coordinates are blanked out in case the luminaire has to be displayed in XYZ-aiming, and<br />

there is no intersection with the aiming plane.<br />

In the case of a modification in the aiming type when there's no intersection with the<br />

aiming plane, the point on the aiming vector, one meter from the luminaire, is chosen as<br />

the aiming point.<br />

Conversion from XYZ aiming to RBA aiming<br />

The direction from the location of the luminaire to the aiming-point is determined.<br />

This direction is expressed in a Rotation, Tilt90 and Tilt0 (Tilt0 is always 0°).<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.13 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Selecting Aiming Presentation types<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> allows you to select either RBA aiming presentation to display the Rot, Tilt90<br />

and Tilt0 aiming angles, or XYZ aiming presentation to display the aiming points. If the<br />

selected aiming presentation is different from the used aiming type, <strong>Calculux</strong> will convert<br />

the unit for aiming into the unit as selected for the aiming presentation. In this way it is<br />

possible to view the value of the aiming angles while the used aiming type is XYZ aiming<br />

or aiming points while the used aiming type is RBA aiming.<br />

The aiming presentation of luminaires can be set in the luminaires list.<br />

Conversion from RBA aiming presentation to XYZ aiming presentation for a luminaire is<br />

only possible when Tilt0=0°. This restriction is included to prevent the loss of orientation<br />

information. When a luminaire, aimed with RBA aiming, has to be displayed in XYZ<br />

aiming and there's no intersection with the aiming plane, the XYZ coordinate values are<br />

blanked out.<br />

(Conversion of the aiming presentation type does not change the aiming type!<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.14 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Aiming offset (Floodlights)<br />

For some asymmetric flood lighting<br />

luminaires an aiming offset is given and<br />

stored in the database.<br />

It can be viewed in the project luminaire<br />

details dimensions tab. The aiming offset is<br />

usually equal to the angle of the maximum<br />

intensity in the C=90° plane.<br />

α<br />

For a luminaire with an aiming offset the<br />

photometric data is treated with respect to<br />

the aiming of the luminaire as if the<br />

maximum intensity is at C=0° and γ=0°.<br />

Aiming the above luminaire with an aiming<br />

offset of<br />

α degrees at Rot=0° and Tilt90=0° gives the<br />

orientation displayed next.<br />

α<br />

α<br />

To ensure that the front glass of the<br />

luminaire is horizontal, the aiming should be<br />

Rot=0° and Tilt90=α°.<br />

α<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.15 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.5.3 Number of luminaires per position (Luminaire Quantity)<br />

Normally there will be one luminaire at each luminaire position. In some special cases it<br />

can be very useful to use a different number of luminaires, for instance;<br />

• When a group of 5 luminaires (floodlights) with the same aiming point is situated on a<br />

pole, these luminaires can technically be regarded as one luminaire. In this case you can<br />

enter a luminaire quantity of 5.<br />

• When in a block arrangement at one particular luminaire position no luminaire can be<br />

installed.<br />

Example:<br />

Luminaire Quantity of position<br />

(20,5)=0.<br />

Z<br />

Y<br />

5<br />

10<br />

0˚ 0˚<br />

0˚<br />

0˚ 0˚<br />

0˚<br />

0˚ 0˚<br />

0˚<br />

0˚ 0˚<br />

0˚<br />

0˚<br />

5 10 15 20<br />

X<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.16 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.6 Individual Luminaires<br />

3.6.1 General<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> allows you to position luminaires individually as well as in groups.<br />

The definition of individual luminaires is done in the 'Individual Luminaires' dialogue<br />

box. This dialogue box contains two tab pages.<br />

In the Luminaires tab you can select the project luminaires which have been defined in the<br />

Project Luminaires dialogue box and set or change luminaire parameters. In the View tab<br />

you can view the luminaires graphically.<br />

3.6.2 Luminaire Definition<br />

In the Luminaires tab you can define and position individual luminaires.<br />

For the definition of a new luminaire the following parameters, if applicable, have to be<br />

set:<br />

• Project Luminaire Type;<br />

• Aiming Presentation;<br />

• Switching Modes.<br />

When the above parameters have been set the luminaire(s) can be added to the luminaire list<br />

by clicking on the 'New' button.<br />

Project Luminaire Type<br />

If a project contains two or more luminaire types you will need to select the required<br />

luminaire type. For details about a project luminaire you can click on the 'Details' button.<br />

Aiming Presentation<br />

With this parameter you can set the aiming presentation of all luminaires in the luminaire<br />

list. Choose from either RBA or XYZ, aiming angles or aiming points.<br />

Switching Modes<br />

If switching modes are used, you can select which switching mode(s) will be appied to all<br />

new created luminaires in the luminaire list.<br />

Luminaire List<br />

The luminaire list contains information about the individually placed luminaires used in<br />

the project. You can view, set, edit, copy or delete information of project luminaires. In the<br />

luminaire list the following luminaire information, if applicable, can be set:<br />

Luminaire Type<br />

If a project contains more luminaires, and afterwards a different luminaire type is required,<br />

you can click on the down arrow in the project luminaire type box and make your<br />

selection.<br />

Luminaire Quantity<br />

With this parameter you can set the number of identical luminaires at a luminaire position<br />

(see also chapter 'Luminaire Position and Orientation'; section 'Luminaire Quantity').<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.17 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Luminaire Position (POS X, POS Y and POS Z)<br />

Use these parameters to enter the XYZ coordinates of the centre of the luminaire in<br />

relation to the origin of the coordinate system.<br />

Luminaire Orientation (Aiming Type)<br />

Depending on the defined Aiming Type and selected Aiming Presentation you can set<br />

and/or view the RBA angles (Rot / Tilt90 / Tilt0) or the XYZ coordinates Aim. Pnt. X /<br />

Aim. Pnt. Y / Aim. Pnt. Z.<br />

(By pressing on the 'To XYZ' or 'To RBA' button you can convert the aiming type of<br />

selected luminaires from RBA aiming to XYZ aiming or vice versa.<br />

Symmetry (Sym.)<br />

If you want to apply symmetry, you can set the symmetry type for the luminaires.<br />

The Sym. column shows which type of Symmetry is used ('NONE', 'X', 'Y' or 'XY'). If X- or<br />

XY symmetry is used, for the X-origin the X coordinate of the YZ plane has to be entered.<br />

If Y- or XY symmetry is used, for the Y-origin column the Y coordinate of the XZ plane<br />

has to be entered.<br />

For more information about symmetry, see chapter 'Symmetry'.<br />

Switching Modes (1, 2, ...)<br />

If switching modes are applied, you can view or set which of the available switching modes<br />

are activated for each luminaire.<br />

Each column number is identical to the switching mode sequence number in the<br />

'Switching Mode' list box. The switching modes columns will only be displayed if more<br />

then one switching mode(s) exist.<br />

Light Regulation Factors (%)<br />

If light regulation factors are applied, you can set and/or view the value of the light<br />

regulation factor (0 - 100%) for each luminaire.<br />

3.6.3 View<br />

The View tab displays the luminaires in the arrangement graphically.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.18 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.7 Luminaire Arrangements<br />

3.7.1 General<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> allows you to position luminaires individually as well as in groups. A number of<br />

luminaires defined as a group is called an luminaire arrangement.<br />

To simplify the definition of an arrangement, <strong>Calculux</strong> contains the 'Arranged Luminaires'<br />

option.<br />

The luminaires in an arrangement are positioned and aimed according to the arrangement<br />

rule and are stored under the 'arrangement name'.<br />

The arrangement generation rules relate to all arrangements (where applicable) and are<br />

explained here for the following arrangements:<br />

• Room Block;<br />

• Block;<br />

• Polar;<br />

• Line;<br />

• Free.<br />

(When you define an arrangement, the arrangement must fit in the room.<br />

A Free arrangement is a special kind of arrangement allowing the luminaires to be<br />

positioned individually. The only thing they share is a common arrangement name.<br />

In the case of a Block, Line, Polar or Room Block arrangement, the luminaire positions are<br />

controlled by the arrangement rule. The other attributes can be set individually.<br />

In general, for each arrangement the following luminaire attributes<br />

(if applicable) must be set:<br />

• Project luminaire Type;<br />

• Position of the arrangement;<br />

• Orientation of the arrangement (Aiming);<br />

• Symmetry type and relevant symmetry origin;<br />

• Number of Same (luminaires per position);<br />

• Switching mode(s).<br />

To simplify the definition of the attributes, the arrangements dialogue box is split into the<br />

following four tab pages.<br />

Arrangement Definition<br />

In the Arrangement Definition tab you can define the name and position of the<br />

arrangement in relation to the XYZ coordinate system. Where applicable you can set the<br />

orientation<br />

(= aiming) of the arrangement.<br />

(For a 'Room Block arrangement' only the orientation of the luminaires can be set.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.19 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Luminaire Definition<br />

In the Luminaire Definition tab you can define the default settings for all luminaires in<br />

the arrangement. The settings are used for the generation of the luminaires at the position<br />

as set in the Arrangement Definition tab and determine the initial generation of the<br />

luminaire list.<br />

The default settings can be changed at any time by making changes to the luminaire<br />

definitions. By using the Apply buttons you ensure the setting changes are carried out for<br />

all luminaires in the luminaire list.<br />

Warning:<br />

Take care when you have created an arrangement with a unique aiming pattern. When you<br />

click on the Aiming Apply button the settings will be applied to all the luminaires in the<br />

luminaire list and the unique aiming pattern will be lost. If you don't want this and it does<br />

happen, click on the Cancel button and the action will be undone. Note that the Cancel<br />

facility is effective in any of the tabs of the arrangement dialogue box.<br />

Luminaire List<br />

In the Luminaire List tab you can view the attributes of each luminaire in the arrangement.<br />

All attributes, except the luminaire positions can be changed. For a Free arrangement, it's<br />

possible to change the position of the luminaires as well.<br />

View<br />

The View tab displays the luminaires in the arrangement graphically.<br />

3.7.2 Room Block Arrangement<br />

A Room Block arrangement is a special type of Block arrangement where the luminaires<br />

are arranged in a rectangular room.<br />

Arrangement Definition<br />

There are two ways to define a Room Block arrangement:<br />

a) You can create a Room Block arrangement using the UF Method (see also chapter<br />

'Room'; section 'UF Method').<br />

The following parameters have to be set:<br />

• Luminaire Type;<br />

• Orientation of the luminaires;<br />

• Name of the arrangement.<br />

If you press the Generate button a regular luminaire pattern will automatically be<br />

generated at the ceiling of the room. The number of generated luminaires depends on the<br />

value you've entered in the 'Required Illuminance Level' field of the 'Room' dialogue box.<br />

The number of luminaires will only be calculated if the information for<br />

the UF Method is included in the Data base.<br />

(If required you can change the value of the 'Number of Luminaires needed'. If the value<br />

fulfils the max. spacing to lighting ratio given in the database, Calulux will perform light<br />

calculations using the value in the 'Number of Luminares needed' field.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.20 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

b) You can create a Room Block arrangement by defining the number of luminaires and<br />

the spacing between the luminaires.<br />

In this case the following parameters have to be set:<br />

• Luminaire Type;<br />

• Orientation of the luminaires;<br />

• Name of the arrangement;<br />

• Number of luminaires in X and Y direction;<br />

• Spacing between the luminaires in X and Y direction;<br />

• Position of the arrangement.<br />

When the Room Block arrangement has been defined, depending on the position of the<br />

arrangement a number of ways of updating are possible:<br />

Using<br />

Regular button<br />

Centre button<br />

Updates<br />

Position X, Y, Z<br />

Position X, Y, Z<br />

Example:<br />

For a Room Block arrangement with default luminaire orientation, the following definition is<br />

given:<br />

Dimensions of the 'room' = 16.0, 10.0, 6.0<br />

Position of the 'Front Bottom<br />

Left' corner of the room = 1.0, 2.0<br />

Number in X = 3<br />

Number in Y = 2<br />

X Spacing = 6.0<br />

Y Spacing = 5.0<br />

Position (of arrangement) = 3.0, 4.0, 6.0 (=P)<br />

This creates the following arrangement:<br />

6<br />

Z<br />

1 3<br />

2 4<br />

0˚ 180˚ 0˚ 180˚<br />

0˚ 180˚<br />

Y<br />

0˚ 180˚<br />

0˚ 180˚<br />

0˚ 180˚<br />

17<br />

X<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.21 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Now luminaire rotation and Tilt is applied to the previous figure:<br />

Rotation = 90°<br />

Tilt90 = 0°<br />

Tilt0 = 0°<br />

Z<br />

180˚ 0˚<br />

Y<br />

6<br />

180˚ 0˚<br />

180˚ 0˚<br />

180˚ 0˚<br />

180˚ 0˚<br />

2<br />

180˚ 0˚<br />

1<br />

17 X<br />

Rotation = 0°<br />

Tilt90 = 45°<br />

Tilt0 = 0°<br />

Z<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

6<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

2<br />

1<br />

17 X<br />

(The warning 'Arrangement does not fit in the room' will appear when the luminaires tilt,<br />

positions the luminaires outside the room. In this case the Z-position of the luminaires<br />

should be changed.<br />

Luminaire Definition<br />

For the definition of the luminaires, the following parameters can be set:<br />

• Symmetry;<br />

• Number of Same;<br />

• Switching Modes.<br />

(For each parameter there is a separate Apply button. When settings are changed you can<br />

click on the Apply button to carry out the settings for all luminaires in the luminaire list.<br />

Selection of different parameter settings for individual luminaires of the arrangement is<br />

done in the luminaire list.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.22 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Symmetry<br />

If you want to apply symmetry, you can set the default symmetry type for the luminaires in<br />

the arrangement.<br />

Number of Same<br />

With this parameter you can set the number of identical luminaires at a luminaire position<br />

(see also chapter 'Luminaire Position and Orientation'; section 'Luminaire Quantity').<br />

Switching Modes<br />

If switching modes are used, you can select which switching mode you want to apply to the<br />

luminaires in the arrangement.<br />

3.7.3 Block Arrangement<br />

In a Block arrangement the luminaires are arranged in a rectangular shape.<br />

Arrangement Definition<br />

For the definition of a Block arrangement, the following parameters have to be set:<br />

• Name of the arrangement;<br />

• Position of the arrangement;<br />

• Orientation of the arrangement;<br />

• Number of luminaires in AB and AC direction;<br />

• Spacing between the luminaires in AB and AC direction.<br />

(To simplify the definition of a Block arrangement you should first define a Block<br />

arrangement without orientation (rotation or tilt) and afterwards<br />

(if applicable) apply rotation and/or tilt.<br />

Example:<br />

For the definition of a Block arrangement without rotation or tilt, set:<br />

Position A The block position.<br />

P<br />

Reference point P is the position of the bottom left luminaire in the<br />

arrangement (if no rotation and tilt is applied).<br />

N AB<br />

The number of luminaires in AB direction (if the block is not rotated,<br />

AB is parallel to the XZ-plane).<br />

N AC<br />

The number of luminaires in AC direction (if the block is not rotated,<br />

AC is parallel to the YZ-plane).<br />

Spacing AB<br />

The distance between the luminaires in the AB direction (D1).<br />

Spacing AC<br />

The distance between the luminaires in the AC direction (D2).<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.23 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

P = 4.0, 3.0, 2.0<br />

N AB<br />

= 3<br />

N AC<br />

= 2<br />

Spacing AB<br />

= 2.0 m<br />

Spacing AC<br />

= 6.0 m<br />

2<br />

Z<br />

3<br />

D2<br />

0˚<br />

P<br />

A<br />

0˚<br />

0˚<br />

0˚<br />

B<br />

Y<br />

C<br />

0˚<br />

0˚<br />

4<br />

D1<br />

X<br />

Now the Block arrangement is generated, you can apply rotation and/or tilt.<br />

For instance:<br />

Rotation = 30°:<br />

The Block arrangement is rotated 30° anti<br />

clockwise around the V-axis which passes<br />

through P and is parallel to the Z-axis.<br />

Z<br />

V<br />

0˚<br />

C<br />

0˚<br />

Y<br />

0˚<br />

2<br />

3<br />

0˚<br />

P<br />

A<br />

0˚<br />

0˚<br />

B<br />

D2<br />

4<br />

30˚<br />

D1<br />

X<br />

(In a Block Arrangement the luminaires are oriented in relation to the XYZ coordinate<br />

system (= global coordinate system). Therefore, only the arrangement is rotated, the<br />

orientation of the individual luminaires is not changed.<br />

Tilt90 = 30°:<br />

The block is rotated 30° around the AC-axis<br />

towards the positive Z-axis.<br />

Z<br />

2<br />

3<br />

D2<br />

4<br />

0˚<br />

A C<br />

P<br />

D1<br />

0˚<br />

30˚<br />

0˚<br />

0˚<br />

Y<br />

0˚<br />

0˚<br />

X<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.24 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Tilt0 = -30°:<br />

The block is rotated 30° around the AB-axis<br />

towards the negative Z-axis.<br />

Z<br />

D2<br />

0˚<br />

C<br />

0˚<br />

0˚<br />

Y<br />

2<br />

3<br />

0˚<br />

P<br />

A<br />

0˚<br />

0˚<br />

B<br />

4<br />

30˚<br />

D1<br />

X<br />

(The block Rotation, Tilt90 and Tilt0 are equivalent to the luminaire Rotation, Tilt90 and<br />

Tilt0 in the way they operate, but they are in fact separate orientations. The block<br />

orientation is set in the 'Arrangement Definition' tab, and controls the luminaire<br />

positions, while the luminaire orientation (= 'Aiming') is set in the 'Luminaire Definition'<br />

tab. If you want to have the luminaires orientated in the same direction as the<br />

arrangement, the angles of the arrangement and luminaire orientation have to be the same.<br />

Luminaire Definition<br />

For the definition of the luminaires, the following parameters can be set:<br />

• Project Luminaire Type;<br />

• Aiming Type;<br />

• Symmetry;<br />

• Number of Same;<br />

• Switching Modes.<br />

(For each parameter there is a separate Apply button. When settings are changed you can<br />

click on the Apply button to carry out the settings for all luminaires in the luminaire list.<br />

Selection of different parameter settings for individual luminaires of the arrangement is<br />

done in the luminaire list.<br />

Project Luminaire Type<br />

If a project contains two or more luminaire types, you need to select the required<br />

luminaire type. If afterwards a different luminaire type is needed, you can click on the<br />

down arrow in the Project Luminaire Type box and make your selection.<br />

Aiming Type<br />

With this parameter you can set the default aiming type (choose from either RBA or XYZ),<br />

aiming angles or aiming points for the luminaires in the arrangement.<br />

Symmetry<br />

If you want to apply symmetry, you can set the default symmetry type for the luminaires in<br />

the arrangement.<br />

Number of Same<br />

With this parameter you can set the number of identical luminaires at a luminaire position<br />

(see also chapter 'Luminaire Position and Orientation'; section 'Luminaire Quantity').<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.25 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Switching Modes<br />

If switching modes are used, you can select which switching mode you want to apply to the<br />

luminaires in the arrangement.<br />

3.7.4 Polar Arrangement<br />

In a Polar arrangement the luminaires are arranged in one or more concentric arcs.<br />

Arrangement Definition<br />

For the definition of a Polar arrangement, the following parameters have to be set:<br />

• Name of the arrangement;<br />

• Centre position of the arrangement;<br />

• Orientation of the arrangement (orientation of the plane);<br />

• Number of luminaires per arc;<br />

• Spacing between the luminaires on an arc;<br />

• Length of an arc;<br />

• Number of concentric arcs;<br />

• Distance between two adjacent arcs;<br />

• Radius of the arc that is nearest to the centre.<br />

When the Polar arrangement has been entered, a number of ways of updating are possible:<br />

Changing<br />

Luminaires per Arc<br />

Spacing along Arc<br />

Length of the Arc<br />

Updates<br />

Spacing along Arc<br />

Length of an Arc (Total Arc)<br />

Spacing along Arc<br />

(To simplify the definition of a Polar arrangement you can best first define an arrangement<br />

without orientation (rotation or tilt) and afterwards (if applicable) apply rotation and/or<br />

tilt.<br />

Example:<br />

For a Polar arrangement without rotation or tilt, the following definition is given:<br />

Centre Position (P) = (10.0, 6.0, 2.0)<br />

Luminaires per Arc = 5<br />

Spacing along Arc = 45°<br />

Total Arc = 180°<br />

# of Concentric Arcs = 2<br />

Distance between Arcs (d) = 5.0 m<br />

Radius of First Arc (r) = 4.0 m<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.26 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Which results in the following<br />

arrangement:<br />

Z<br />

Y<br />

90˚<br />

2<br />

6<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

d r P<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

90˚ 90˚<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

10<br />

90˚<br />

X<br />

Now rotation and tilt is applied to the previously defined Polar arrangement.<br />

For instance:<br />

Rotation = 30°:<br />

Z<br />

90˚<br />

Y<br />

90˚<br />

6<br />

2<br />

90˚ 90˚<br />

90˚ 90˚ 90˚<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

P<br />

30˚<br />

10 X<br />

The arrangement is rotated 30° counter clockwise around the V-axis which passes through<br />

P and is parallel to the Z-axis.<br />

(In a Polar arrangement, the orientation of the luminaires is related to the centre point (P)<br />

of the arrangement. So every time you change the orientation of the arrangement, the<br />

orientation of the luminaire will change too.<br />

Tilt90 = 30°:<br />

Z<br />

Y<br />

2<br />

6<br />

90˚ 90˚ 90˚<br />

90˚<br />

A'<br />

90˚ 90˚<br />

P<br />

90˚ 90˚<br />

30˚<br />

C'<br />

90˚ 90˚<br />

10 X<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.27 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

The arrangement is rotated 30° around the A'C'-axis towards the positive Z-axis.<br />

If no rotation is applied, A'C' is parallel to the YZ-plane.<br />

Tilt0 = -30°:<br />

Z<br />

2<br />

A'<br />

6<br />

90˚<br />

Y<br />

90˚<br />

90˚ 90˚<br />

P ref<br />

A'<br />

90˚ 90˚ 90˚<br />

90˚ 90˚<br />

90˚ 90˚<br />

30˚<br />

10<br />

B'<br />

X<br />

The arrangement is rotated 30° around the A'B'-axis towards the negative Z-axis.<br />

If no rotation is applied, A'B' is parallel to the XZ-plane.<br />

Luminaire Definition<br />

For the definition of the luminaires, the following parameters can be set:<br />

• Project Luminaire Type;<br />

• Aiming Type;<br />

• Symmetry;<br />

• Number of Same;<br />

• Switching Modes.<br />

(For each parameter there is a separate Apply button. When settings are changed you can<br />

click on the Apply button to carry out the settings for all luminaires in the luminaire list.<br />

Selection of different parameter settings for individual luminaires of the arrangement is<br />

done in the luminaire list.<br />

Project Luminaire Type<br />

If a project contains two or more luminaire types, you need to select the required<br />

luminaire type. If afterwards a different luminaire type is needed, you can click on the<br />

down arrow in the Project Luminaire Type box and make your selection.<br />

Aiming Type<br />

With this parameter you can set the default Aiming Type (choose from either RBA or<br />

XYZ), Aiming Angles or Aiming Points for the luminaires in the arrangement.<br />

Example:<br />

• When the luminaire orientation is set to<br />

Rot = 90°<br />

Tilt90 = 0°<br />

Tilt0 = 0°<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.28 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


90˚<br />

90˚<br />

Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

This results in the following arrangement:<br />

Z<br />

2<br />

6<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

Y<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

P<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

10<br />

X<br />

• When the luminaire orientation is set to<br />

Rot = 90°<br />

Tilt90 = 45°<br />

Tilt0 = 0°<br />

The following arrangement will be created:<br />

Z<br />

Y<br />

90˚<br />

2<br />

6<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

P<br />

90˚<br />

90˚<br />

10<br />

X<br />

Symmetry<br />

If you want to apply symmetry, you can set the default symmetry type for the luminaires in<br />

the arrangement.<br />

Number of Same<br />

With this parameter you can set the number of identical luminaires at a luminaire position<br />

(see also chapter 'Luminaire Position and Orientation'; section 'Luminaire Quantity').<br />

Switching Modes<br />

If switching modes are used, you can select which switching mode you want to apply to the<br />

luminaires in the arrangement.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.29 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.7.5 Line Arrangement<br />

In a Line arrangement the luminaires will be arranged in a line.<br />

Arrangement Definition<br />

For the definition of a Line arrangement, the following parameters have to be set:<br />

• Name of the arrangement;<br />

• First and last point of the line;<br />

• Number of luminaires in the line;<br />

• Spacing between the luminaires.<br />

(When the line coordinates have been entered, the line orientation is automatically set by<br />

the program. Any subsequent alterations to the line coordinates update the orientation.<br />

Example:<br />

A = First point (= reference point).<br />

The reference point is the position of<br />

the first luminaire in the arrangement.<br />

B = Last point<br />

α = Rotation<br />

β = Tilt90<br />

9.5<br />

2<br />

Z<br />

A<br />

D<br />

2 10<br />

β<br />

B<br />

Y<br />

2<br />

α<br />

8<br />

X<br />

The angle α corresponds with the Rotation of the Line arrangement.<br />

The angle β corresponds with the Tilt90 of the Line arrangement.<br />

When the Line arrangement has been entered, several ways of updating are possible:<br />

Changing<br />

First point<br />

Spacing<br />

Number of Luminaires<br />

Last point<br />

Orientation<br />

Updates<br />

Last point<br />

Last point<br />

Spacing<br />

Spacing and Orientation<br />

Last point<br />

The following Line arrangements have been created to demonstrate the different ways of<br />

defining a Line arrangement.<br />

The Line arrangement below has the following settings:<br />

First point = 1.0, 1.0, 5.0<br />

Last point = 1.0, 6.0, 5.0<br />

Number of Luminaires = 3<br />

Spacing = 2.5<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.30 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

This will create the following line orientation automatically:<br />

Rot = 90°<br />

Tilt90 = 0°<br />

The luminaire orientation uses the default<br />

settings which are set to:<br />

Rot = 0°<br />

Tilt90 = 0°<br />

Tilt0 = 0°<br />

Z<br />

270˚<br />

5 A B<br />

0˚<br />

2.5<br />

270˚<br />

0˚<br />

270˚<br />

0˚<br />

Y<br />

1<br />

α=90˚<br />

1<br />

X<br />

• From the previous illustration, the luminaire orientation is now set to:<br />

a) Rot = 0°<br />

Tilt90 = 45° (rotation of 45° around C=0°...C=180° axis)<br />

Tilt0 = 0°<br />

Which results in the following arrangement:<br />

Z<br />

1<br />

1<br />

A<br />

0˚<br />

45˚<br />

2.5<br />

0˚<br />

6<br />

B<br />

0˚<br />

5 5<br />

α=90˚<br />

A2 B2<br />

Y<br />

X<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.31 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

b) Rot = 90° (rotation of 90°C around the vertical axis)<br />

Tilt90 = 45° (rotation of 45° around C=0°...C=180° axis)<br />

Tilt0 = 0°<br />

Which results in the following arrangement:<br />

Z<br />

A<br />

2.5<br />

180˚ 0˚<br />

B<br />

180˚ 0˚<br />

1<br />

180˚ 0˚<br />

90˚<br />

45˚<br />

5 5<br />

1<br />

6<br />

α=90˚<br />

A2 B2<br />

Y<br />

X<br />

• If a line arrangement is given the following settings:<br />

First point = 2.0, 2.0, 2.0<br />

Last point = 8.0,10.0, 9.5<br />

Number of Luminaires = 3<br />

Spacing<br />

= 6.25 m (calculated automatically by the program)<br />

This will create the following line orientation automatically:<br />

Rot = 53.1° (α)<br />

Tilt90 = 36.9° (β)<br />

When the luminaire orientation (Aiming Type) is set to:<br />

Rot = 0°<br />

Tilt90 = 45° (rotation of 45° around C=0°...C=0° axis)<br />

Tilt0 = 0°<br />

The following arrangement will be created:<br />

Z<br />

9.5<br />

2<br />

0˚<br />

0˚<br />

A B<br />

2 10<br />

β<br />

0˚<br />

Y<br />

2<br />

α<br />

8<br />

X<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.32 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

The luminaire orientation in the above<br />

arrangement can now be set with the same<br />

values as the line orientation (Rot = 53.1°;<br />

Tilt90 = 36.9°), so that the luminaire<br />

orientation is 'in line' with the line<br />

orientation.<br />

9.5<br />

2<br />

Z<br />

90˚<br />

A B<br />

90˚<br />

β<br />

2 10<br />

90˚<br />

Y<br />

2<br />

α<br />

α<br />

8<br />

X<br />

Luminaire Definition<br />

For the definition of the luminaires, the following parameters can be set:<br />

• Project Luminaire Type;<br />

• Aiming Type;<br />

• Symmetry;<br />

• Number of Same;<br />

• Switching Modes.<br />

(For each parameter there is a separate Apply button. When settings are changed you can<br />

click on the Apply button to carry out the settings for all luminaires in the luminaire list.<br />

Selection of different parameter settings for individual luminaires of the arrangement is<br />

done in the luminaire list.<br />

Project Luminaire Type<br />

If a project contains two or more luminaire types, you need to select the required<br />

luminaire type. If afterwards a different luminaire type is needed, you can click on the<br />

down arrow in the Project Luminaire Type box and make your selection.<br />

Aiming Type<br />

With this parameter you can set the default aiming type (choose from either RBA or XYZ),<br />

aiming angles or aiming points for the luminaires in the arrangement.<br />

Symmetry<br />

If you want to apply symmetry, you can set the default symmetry type for the luminaires in<br />

the arrangement.<br />

Number of Same<br />

With this parameter you can set the number of identical luminaires at a luminaire position<br />

(see also chapter 'Luminaire Position and Orientation'; section 'Luminaire Quantity').<br />

Switching Modes<br />

If switching modes are used, you can select which switching mode you want to apply to the<br />

luminaires in the arrangement.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.33 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.7.6 Free Arrangement<br />

A Free arrangement is a special arrangement type, where the number of luminaires and<br />

their position is not defined by an arrangement rule.<br />

Arrangement Definition<br />

For the definition of a Free Arrangement only the name of the arrangement has to be<br />

specified. There is no arrangement rule for defining the number of luminaires and their<br />

positions.<br />

(The definition of the luminaires and their positions is done in the same way as individual<br />

luminaires (see chapter 'Individual Luminaires').<br />

Luminaire Definition<br />

For the definition of the luminaires, the following parameters can be set:<br />

• Project Luminaire Type;<br />

• Aiming Type;<br />

• Symmetry;<br />

• Number of Same;<br />

• Switching Modes.<br />

(For each parameter there is a separate Apply button. When settings are changed you can<br />

click on the Apply button to carry out the settings for all luminaires in the luminaire list.<br />

Selection of different parameter settings for individual luminaires of the arrangement is<br />

done in the luminaire list.<br />

Project Luminaire Type<br />

If a project contains two or more luminaire types, you need to select the required<br />

luminaire type. If afterwards a different luminaire type is needed, you can click on the<br />

down arrow in the Project Luminaire Type box and make your selection.<br />

Aiming Type<br />

With this parameter you can set the default aiming type (choose from either RBA or XYZ),<br />

aiming angles or aiming points for the luminaires in the arrangement.<br />

Symmetry<br />

If you want to apply symmetry, you can set the default symmetry type for the luminaires in<br />

the arrangement.<br />

Number of Same<br />

With this parameter you can set the number of identical luminaires at a luminaire position<br />

(see also chapter 'Luminaire Position and Orientation'; section 'Luminaire Quantity').<br />

Switching Modes<br />

If switching modes are used, you can select which switching mode you want to apply to the<br />

luminaires in the arrangement.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.34 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.7.7 Ungrouping a luminaire arrangement<br />

After you have positioned a luminaire arrangement, you may wish to adjust the position of<br />

the individual luminaires slightly. When you Ungroup a luminair arrangement, the<br />

luminaires are no longer part of an arrangement but individual luminaires.<br />

It is then possible to, change, delete or replace each luminaire individually.<br />

(A similar result (roughly) is obtained when a luminaire arrangement is converted into a<br />

Free arrangement.<br />

3.7.8 Convert into a Free Arrangement<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> allows you to convert an existing arrangement or a group of individual<br />

luminaires into a Free arrangement. In a Free Arrangement the luminaires are considered<br />

as part of an arrangement but there is no arrangement rule for defining the number of<br />

luminaires and their positions. Only the name of the arrangement has to be specified.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.35 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.8 Symmetry<br />

3.8.1 General<br />

Symmetry is an optional specification, that can be used to simplify individual luminaire or<br />

luminaire arrangement entries when one or more luminaires have a symmetrical<br />

orientation and/or position. If applied, the luminaires are duplicated on the opposite side<br />

of a line parallel to the<br />

X-axis or Y-axis or they are duplicated to all quadrants.<br />

The use of symmetry in luminaire positioning and orientation is explained with the<br />

following example:<br />

Assume that you've created an indoor sports hall of width 80m and length 140m.<br />

The default position of the Front Bottom Left corner (reference point or P .<br />

) of the sports<br />

hall will be located at the origin of the XYZ co-ordinate system.<br />

Y<br />

140<br />

O<br />

P<br />

80<br />

X<br />

The easiest way to position two identical luminaires at opposite corners of the sports hall is<br />

to position one luminaire and apply symmetry to the lighting installation to position the<br />

second luminaire. If you would do this without first translating the origin of the XYZ<br />

coordinate system to the centre of the sports hall, the new luminaire would be positioned<br />

outside the room. In this case an error message would appear on your screen.<br />

In order to apply symmetry to the lighting installation in a room you'll need to position<br />

the origin of the plane(s) of symmetry inside the room.<br />

Example:<br />

You want to position two identical floodlights, orientated towards the centre, at the<br />

opposite corners of a sports hall (width 80m and length 140m). The axis you want to use<br />

to apply symmetry are equal to the X = 0 and Y=0 axis. In this case, the centre of the sports<br />

hall has to be in the origin (O).<br />

(After defining the dimensions of the sports hall you can position the origin (O) at the<br />

centre of the sports hall by clicking on the 'Centre' button (Room Definition tab).<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.36 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

At (-35, 65, 10) you have positioned a floodlight, orientated towards the centre of the<br />

sports hall.<br />

This will create the following situation:<br />

Y<br />

C=270˚ C=90˚<br />

B<br />

C=0˚ C=180˚<br />

70<br />

32.5<br />

A<br />

-40 -17.5 17.5 40<br />

O<br />

X<br />

-32.5<br />

C<br />

D<br />

-70<br />

If the axis you want to use to apply symmetry is not equal to a central axis of the room,<br />

you'll have to change the settings of the X-origin or<br />

Y-origin (placing the plane of symmetry in the middle between the existing and the 'new'<br />

luminaire). You can do this in several ways:<br />

• For all new created luminaires in a project this is done by replacing the settings of the X-<br />

origin and/or Y-origin in the Symmetry tab<br />

(Project Options).<br />

• For luminaires in a luminaire arrangement this is done by replacing the settings of the X-<br />

origin and/or Y-origin in the Luminaire Definition tab (Arranged Luminaires), then<br />

clicking on the Apply button.<br />

• For individual luminaires or individual luminaires in an arrangement this is done by<br />

replacing the settings of the X-origin and/or Y-origin in the Luminaires tab (Individual<br />

Luminaires) or Luminaire List tab (Arranged Luminaires).<br />

(When symmetry is applied and the position and/or orientation of a luminaire is changed,<br />

the position and/or orientation of all symmetrical luminaires will also change according to<br />

the applied symmetry type.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.37 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.8.2 X-Symmetry<br />

If you select X-symmetry the existing luminaire in B quadrant is duplicated to the opposite<br />

position in A quadrant with the new coordinates (35, 65, 10). The result of this action will<br />

look like this:<br />

C=270˚ C=90˚<br />

B<br />

C=0˚ C=180˚<br />

Y<br />

70<br />

A<br />

32.5<br />

C=0˚ C=180˚<br />

C=90˚ C=270˚<br />

-40 -17.5 17.5 40<br />

O<br />

X<br />

-32.5<br />

C<br />

D<br />

-70<br />

3.8.3 Y-Symmetry<br />

If you select Y-symmetry the existing luminaire in B quadrant is duplicated to the opposite<br />

position in C quadrant with the new coordinates (-35, -65, 10). When Y-symmetry is used,<br />

the Y-origin field displays the Y coordinate of the XZ plane. The result of this action will<br />

look like this:<br />

Y<br />

C=270˚ C=90˚<br />

B<br />

C=0˚ C=180˚<br />

70<br />

32.5<br />

A<br />

-40 -17.5 17.5 40<br />

O<br />

X<br />

C=180˚ C=0˚<br />

C=270˚ C=90˚<br />

C<br />

-32.5<br />

-70<br />

D<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.38 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.8.4 XY-Symmetry<br />

If you select XY-symmetry the existing luminaire in B quadrant is duplicated to all other<br />

corners at the coordinates (-35, -65, 10), (35, 65, 10) and (35, -65, 10).<br />

When X- or XY-symmetry is used, the X-origin field displays the X coordinate of the YZ<br />

plane. When Y- or XY symmetry is used, the Y-origin field displays the Y coordinate of the<br />

XZ plane. The result of this action will look like this:<br />

C=270˚ C=90˚<br />

B<br />

C=0˚ C=180˚<br />

Y<br />

70<br />

A<br />

32.5<br />

C=0˚ C=180˚<br />

C=90˚<br />

C=270˚<br />

-40 -17.5 17.5 40<br />

O<br />

X<br />

C=180˚ C=0˚<br />

C=270˚ C=90˚<br />

C<br />

-32.5<br />

D<br />

-70<br />

C=90˚<br />

C=270˚<br />

C=180˚ C=0˚<br />

Remember that symmetry is not only applied to the position of the luminaire, but also to<br />

its orientation: e.g. X-symmetry of a luminaire at coordinates (-35, 65, 10) resulted in a new<br />

luminaire on (35, 65, 10) which was rotated automatically so that it's still orientated<br />

towards the centre (0, 0, 0).<br />

Applying symmetry about the Y-axis to a lighting design does not automatically imply a<br />

symmetric light distribution. This is only the case if the luminaire is symmetric about its<br />

C=90°...C=270° plane.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.39 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.9 Grids<br />

3.9.1 General<br />

A grid is an area containing a specific number of points at which lighting calculations are<br />

carried out. A grid must always be rectangular in shape and can be in any plane in space<br />

(horizontal, vertical or sloping).<br />

It is useful to think of a grid as an invisible surface to which a light meter can be attached.<br />

The amount of light measured by the light meter changes as it is moved to different points<br />

on the surface. It also changes if the light meter is moved from one side of the surface to<br />

another.<br />

There are two types of calculation grids:<br />

• Generated grids;<br />

• User defined (Free added) grids.<br />

3.9.2 Generated grids<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> allows you to choose seven preset grids which lay on the six surfaces of<br />

the room and the working plane.<br />

Details about the grid (like position, number of points) are derived from the selected<br />

standard: CIBSE, DIN, NEN or <strong>Calculux</strong>. The '<strong>Calculux</strong>' standard is a grid type which has<br />

been developed by <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> after years of practical experience in indoor lighting<br />

applications.<br />

Preset grids are a convenient feature when you do not want to define a grid yourself, or<br />

when you need to conform to the standards above.<br />

You can also use the preset grids as an aid to defining your own grid.<br />

For example, if you wish to define a grid parallel to the left wall (x=0) but shifted 1 m<br />

towards the centre of the room, then all you have to do is to disconnect the grid by<br />

selecting Grid Points Method 'No Rule'. Now you can change the x coordinates of three of<br />

the grid's corner points from 0.0 to 1.0.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> standard grids<br />

Working plane<br />

The working plane is defined as the area at working plane height which remains when a<br />

border zone is subtracted from the room. Grid points are spaced over the working plane.<br />

The distance from the first grid point to the border zone is 0.5 times the spacing between<br />

the rest of the grid points. The number of calculation points along either side of the grid is<br />

calculated with the following equation:<br />

a<br />

side<br />

Number of grid points = Min(12, Int ( + 1))<br />

0.5<br />

side = the length or width of the grid<br />

c<br />

b<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.40 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

This equation is subjected to the following constraints:<br />

• Up to 6 meters the maximum spacing between grid points is 0.5 m;<br />

• The maximum number of grid points is 12 and the minimum number is 5.<br />

Room Surfaces<br />

For each of the room surfaces, the number of calculated grid points and the spacing<br />

between the grid points is according to the above rules.<br />

Example:<br />

In a room measuring 5.4 x 3.6 x 3.0 m (l x w x h) with a border of 0.5 m the number of<br />

grid points on the working plane for a CLX type grid have to be calculated.<br />

Using the above formula this will give the following result:<br />

The number of grid points in width direction<br />

a width of grid = width of room - (2 x border) <br />

3.6 - 1 = 2.6<br />

width of grid 2.6<br />

b Int (<br />

+ 1) = Int ( + 1) <br />

0.5<br />

0.5<br />

Int (6.2) = 6<br />

c Number of grid points (width) <br />

Min (12,6) = 6<br />

The number of grid points in length direction<br />

a length of grid = length of room - (2 x border) <br />

5.4 – 1 = 4.4<br />

b Int (+1) = Int (+1) <br />

Int (9.8) = 9<br />

c Number of grid points (length) <br />

Min (12,9) = 9<br />

As both calculated values are greater than 5 and less than 12, they are acceptable<br />

NEN standard grids<br />

Working plane<br />

The working plane is defined as the area at working plane height which remains when a<br />

border zone is subtracted from the room. The default value for the border zone should be<br />

set to 0.6 m. However, it's possible to set a different border for each side of the working<br />

plane.<br />

Grid points are divided over the remaining area. The distance from the first grid point to<br />

the border is 0.5 times the spacing between the rest of the grid points. The spacing in the<br />

length and width directions should not be greater than the smallest of the following values:<br />

• 1/3 x (Luminaire height - working plane height). If luminaires are positioned at different<br />

heights in the room, or have yet to be positioned, the room height is taken as the height of<br />

the luminaire position.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.41 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

• 1/3 x (Length of side under consideration) i.e. 1/3 x (Width - (left border + right border))<br />

or 1/3 x (Length - (front border + back border)).<br />

• 3 m.<br />

Room Surfaces<br />

The number of calculation points along either side of a grid corresponding to one of the<br />

room's surfaces can be calculated with the aid of the following equation:<br />

side<br />

Number of grid points = Min (12, Int( + 1))<br />

0.5<br />

This equation is subject to the following constraints:<br />

• The maximum spacing between grid points is 0.5 m;<br />

• The maximum number of grid points is 12 and the minimum number is 5.<br />

DIN standard grids<br />

Working plane<br />

The grid points are divided over the working plane. The distance from the first grid point<br />

to the border is 0.5 times the spacing between the rest of the grid points. In the DIN<br />

standard it's recommended to set the border zone to 0.<br />

The number of grid points is related to the length of the side of the grid under<br />

consideration as follows:<br />

• Length of side is 0 till 2 m use 7 grid points;<br />

• Length of side is 2 till 5 m use 8 grid points;<br />

• Length of side is 5 till 8 m use 9 grid points;<br />

• Length of side is 8 till 10 m use 10 grid points;<br />

• Else<br />

use 12 grid points.<br />

Room Surfaces<br />

The number of grid points and their spacing for each of the room surfaces is the same as<br />

above.<br />

CIBSE standard grids<br />

Working plane<br />

The working plane is defined as the area at working plane height which remains when a<br />

border zone is subtracted from the room.<br />

Grid points are divided over the working plane. The distance between the grid points<br />

should be approximately a meter. <strong>Calculux</strong> meets these requirements by setting a grid to<br />

fill the working plane with the first grid point at a half grid spacing from the edge of the<br />

border.<br />

The number of calculation points along either side of the grid is calculated with the aid of<br />

the following equation:<br />

side<br />

Number of grid points = Min (12, Int( + 1))<br />

1<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.42 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

This equation yields a grid spacing of approximately 1 m. The grid is subject to the<br />

constraint of a minimum of 5 grid points in any direction. The maximum number of grid<br />

points is 12.<br />

(In CIBSE standard it is recommendable to set a border zone of 0.5 m.<br />

Room Surfaces<br />

The number of grid points and the spacing between them follows the same rules as above<br />

for each of the room surfaces.<br />

3.9.3 User defined (Free added) grids<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> enables you to define your own grids, or to change the specifications of existing<br />

grids.<br />

If a grid lies on one of the room surfaces, the lighting calculations should be made for the<br />

inner side of the surface. If a grid lies within the room (a virtual grid), the user must<br />

specify the side of the grid (1 or 2) on which the calculations are performed.<br />

1 2<br />

Size and position of a grid: points A, B and C<br />

A grid is defined by specifying the X, Y and Z coordinates of the three reference corners A,<br />

B and C. The 4th reference corner is calculated automatically because the grid is a<br />

rectangle. Usually point A is considered the bottom left corner of the grid, so when this is<br />

the case, the reference corners are as follows:<br />

A = The bottom left corner of the grid<br />

B = The bottom right corner of the grid<br />

C = The top left corner of the grid<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.43 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

The following rules apply to grids:<br />

a) The vectors (AB) and (AC) cannot be zero and must be perpendicular.<br />

A small deviation from perpendicularity is allowed, <strong>Calculux</strong> will correct this<br />

automatically. This is especially useful when a person, using a system with limited<br />

accuracy, has to specify the corners of a grid with sides that are not parallel to the axis<br />

of the coordinate system.<br />

b) The reference corners A, B and C can not be on one line.<br />

The following illustrations display a horizontal, vertical and sloping grid.<br />

Horizontal grid<br />

Z<br />

Y<br />

n<br />

20 65<br />

C<br />

A<br />

20 50<br />

B<br />

X<br />

Vertical grid<br />

30<br />

60<br />

C<br />

n<br />

A B<br />

20 100<br />

Y<br />

X<br />

Sloping grid<br />

Z<br />

Y<br />

C<br />

30<br />

n<br />

20 60<br />

30<br />

A<br />

35<br />

70<br />

B<br />

X<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.44 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Calculation points in a grid<br />

The number of calculation points you define in AB and AC direction is used to divide the<br />

grid into equal parts. These are the points at which the lighting calculations will be carried<br />

out. There is always a calculation point on each corner. For example, if you set both<br />

numbers of points in AB and AC direction to 4, the total number of grid points is<br />

4 x 4 = 16, see figure below. The lighting calculations are performed at each of these points.<br />

Distance between calculation grid points:<br />

D =<br />

Total length of vector<br />

(Nr.of grid points along vector) - 1<br />

The number of divisions along (vector) AB and AC is the number of grid points along that<br />

vector - 1.<br />

In the figure below, the distance between the calculation grid points in AB and AC direction<br />

is:<br />

D AB<br />

=<br />

30<br />

4-1 = 10<br />

D AC<br />

=<br />

45<br />

4-1 = 15<br />

Z<br />

Y<br />

n<br />

20 65<br />

C<br />

A<br />

20 50<br />

B<br />

X<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.45 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Default side<br />

It is usually obvious on which side of the grid (it has two sides) the calculations are to be<br />

carried. However, for some calculations, such as surface illuminance and luminance it is<br />

not always obvious and therefore becomes necessary to define the default side of the grid.<br />

The default side of the grid is related to the orientation of A, B and C and is determined<br />

using the right hand rule. The direction of the arrow (the normal vector on the grid area)<br />

indicates the side of the grid which is the default. This is always the case unless it is<br />

specified otherwise.<br />

C<br />

A<br />

B<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

Grid coupling<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> enables you to connect a grid to an application field, (a calculation grid usually<br />

lies within an application field) ensuring that any changes made to the field parameters<br />

automatically change the grid parameters. You can set a calculation grid default for each<br />

application field type in the application field defaults dialogue box. The following example<br />

demonstrates these principles:<br />

(Make sure the grid is located inside the room.<br />

General field<br />

Width<br />

Length<br />

Centre position<br />

Calculation grid:<br />

spacing AB<br />

spacing AC<br />

include Mid Point<br />

at Centre Width<br />

include Mid Point<br />

at Centre Length<br />

= 15 m<br />

= 28 m<br />

= 0 [x=0.0, y=0.0]<br />

= 2 meters<br />

= 2 meters<br />

= yes<br />

= yes<br />

This will give the following grid reference corner coordinates, see next figure:<br />

X Y Z<br />

A - 8.0 - 14.0 0.0<br />

B + 8.0 - 14.0 0.0<br />

C - 8.0 + 14.0 0.0<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.46 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Y<br />

-8.0, 14.0<br />

C<br />

Y=14.0<br />

(0,0,0)<br />

X<br />

X=7.5<br />

-8.0, -14.0 8.0, -14.0<br />

A<br />

B<br />

Now moving the centre position of the general field to 5, 0, 0 the grid parameters will<br />

automatically change to:<br />

X Y Z<br />

A - 3.0 - 14.0 0.0<br />

B + 13.0 - 14.0 0.0<br />

C - 3.0 + 14.0 0.0<br />

Y<br />

-3.0, 14.0<br />

C<br />

Y=14.0<br />

(5,0,0)<br />

(0,0,0)<br />

X<br />

X=12.5<br />

-3.0, -14.0 13.0, -14.0<br />

A<br />

B<br />

If in the first example the general field width changes to 20m, the new coordinates will be:<br />

X Y Z<br />

A -10.0 -14.0 0.0<br />

B +10.0 -14.0 0.0<br />

C -10.0 +14.0 0.0<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.47 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Y<br />

-10.0, 14.0<br />

C<br />

Y=14.0<br />

(0,0,0)<br />

X<br />

X=10.0<br />

-10.0, -14.0<br />

A<br />

B<br />

10.0, -14.0<br />

The grid corners can fall outside the general field due to the spacing leading rule, with the<br />

centre point of the dimension of the application field being included. See section 'Spacing<br />

leading' for a more detailed explanation.<br />

To contain the grid inside the general field it is connected to, exclude 'Mid Point at<br />

Centre':<br />

Mid Point at Centre Width = no<br />

Mid Point at Centre Length = no<br />

The grid corner coordinates will change to:<br />

X Y Z<br />

A -9.0 -13.0 0.0<br />

B +9.0 -13.0 0.0<br />

C -9.0 +13.0 0.0<br />

Y<br />

-9.0, 13.0<br />

C<br />

Y=14.0<br />

(0,0,0)<br />

X<br />

X=10.0<br />

-9.0, -13.0<br />

A<br />

B<br />

9.0, -13.0<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.48 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

This aspect of <strong>Calculux</strong> is very user-friendly: you'll begin to appreciate the benefits of grid<br />

coupling when you start building your own projects.<br />

For connecting a grid to an application field the following grid point methods are<br />

possible:<br />

No Rule<br />

When a grid is connected to a application field with 'No Rule', there will be no relation<br />

between the definition of the grid and the definition of the field. The grid is defined by the<br />

corner points (A, B and C), the number of points in the AB and AC direction, and the<br />

direction of the normal vector.<br />

The grid will remain at the same position when the application field is moved and will also<br />

be deleted if the application field is deleted.<br />

Points Leading<br />

Along each dimension (i.e. length and width of the application field) the number of<br />

calculation grid points is defined. These points will be evenly spread over the surface of the<br />

application field starting at the edge or at half spacing from the edge, depending on your<br />

selection. Once your selections have been made, <strong>Calculux</strong> calculates the positions of A, B<br />

and C displaying the grid in the view box.<br />

In the following figure the number of calculation grid points along AB is 7, starting at half<br />

spacing from the edge. This gives a spacing of 10m. (between calculation points).<br />

A<br />

5m<br />

70m<br />

B<br />

0.0<br />

70.0<br />

In the following figure the number of calculation grid points along AB is 7, starting at the<br />

edge (point A). This gives a spacing of 11.67m. (between calculation points).<br />

A<br />

11.67m<br />

70m<br />

B<br />

0.0 70.0<br />

Spacing Leading<br />

Along each dimension (i.e. length and width of the application field) the spacing of the<br />

calculation grid points is defined, together with the choice whether or not to include the<br />

centre of each dimension in the application field. Once your selections have been made,<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> calculates the positions of A, B and C displaying the grid in the view box.<br />

In the following figure the spacing between the calculation grid points along AB is 10m.<br />

The centre point of the dimension of the application field is not included, giving:<br />

• The first point at X = +2.5m;<br />

• The last point at X = +72.5m.<br />

A<br />

2.5m 10m<br />

75m<br />

B<br />

0.0 75.0<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.49 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

In the following figure the spacing between the calculation grid points along AB is 10m.<br />

The centre point of the dimension of the application field is included, giving:<br />

• The first point at X = -2.5m;<br />

• The last point at X = +77.5m.<br />

A<br />

75m<br />

2.5m 10m<br />

2.5m<br />

B<br />

0.0 75.0<br />

The distance between the application area and the border grid point is, at a maximum, half<br />

that of the spacing. In case spacing leading is used, the calculation grid can be larger than<br />

the application field to which it is connected. To include the grid within the field, switch<br />

between 'Mid Point at Centre' included 'Yes' or 'No'.<br />

Normal vector of a grid<br />

The normal vector is perpendicular to the plane of the grid and is defined by using the<br />

right-handed coordinate system.<br />

Presentation of results<br />

When the results of lighting calculations are presented in a textual table, they have a<br />

particular format. The calculated results for point A always appear at the bottom left<br />

corner of the table, the results for point B at the bottom right corner and the results for C<br />

at the top left corner, for example:<br />

A: x = 0.25 y = 0.25 z = 0.00<br />

B: x = 3.75 y = 0.25 z = 0.00<br />

C: x = 0.25 y = 5.75 z = 0.00<br />

If the number of points AB = 8 and AC = 12 and no output rotation is performed, this<br />

will give the following format:<br />

C<br />

L (Y)<br />

5.75<br />

5.25<br />

4.75<br />

4.25<br />

3.75<br />

3.25<br />

2.75<br />

2.25<br />

1.75<br />

1.25<br />

0.75<br />

0.25<br />

0<br />

A<br />

0.25 1.25 2.25 3.25<br />

B<br />

W (X)<br />

L<br />

W<br />

= Length<br />

= Width<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.50 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

The '+' represents the calculated result, (you can define points A, B and C to create any<br />

layout for the results you require).<br />

A different presentation of the calculated results can be displayed by defining the<br />

coordinates of points A, B and C as follows:<br />

A: x = 0.25 y = 0.25 z = 0.00;<br />

B: x = 0.25 y = 5.75 z = 0.00;<br />

C: x = 3.75 y = 0.25 z = 0.00.<br />

If the number of points AB = 8 and AC = 12 and no rotation is applied, this will give the<br />

following format:<br />

C<br />

W (X)<br />

3.25<br />

2.75<br />

2.25<br />

1.75<br />

1.25<br />

0.75<br />

0.25<br />

0<br />

A<br />

0.25 1.25 2.25 3.25 4.25 5.25<br />

B<br />

L (Y)<br />

L<br />

W<br />

= Length<br />

= Width<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.51 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.10 Shapes<br />

A shape is a surface area in the same plane as a grid. Shapes can be used to create a userdefined<br />

form on the rectangular grid which is excluded from the calculations. Virtually any<br />

kind of form can be created. Shapes are connected to a grid, therefore shapes can only be<br />

added after a grid is defined. If multiple shapes are defined for a grid, each shape has an<br />

unique name.<br />

In <strong>Calculux</strong>, shapes can be set active or inactive.<br />

Active and inactive shapes<br />

Each shape can be set active or inactive individually. Only grid points not covered, or<br />

covered by inactive shapes will be used for calculation by <strong>Calculux</strong>.<br />

The shapes on a grid cover a grid point if at least one active shape covers the grid point.<br />

In <strong>Calculux</strong> shapes can be defined in two ways:<br />

• Pre-defined shapes<br />

• User-defined shapes<br />

3.10.1 Pre-defined shapes<br />

In <strong>Calculux</strong>, some application fields use a connected grid other than the standard<br />

rectangle. For these application fields a set of pre-defined shapes is used to create different<br />

application field outlines. If the size of the grid is changed, the position and size of the<br />

shapes is updated automatically. The user cannot change or delete these pre-defined shapes,<br />

but can duplicate or add a shape. A duplicated shape will be a user-defined shape. Each predefined<br />

shape can be set active or inactive.<br />

3.10.2 User-defined shapes<br />

On all calculation grids the user can add shapes by specifying the required input<br />

parameters. The user can add, change, duplicate or delete shapes. A user-defined shape can<br />

be set active or inactive.<br />

In <strong>Calculux</strong>, the following shape types can be defined by the user:<br />

• Set of points<br />

• Rectangle<br />

• Closed polygon<br />

• Arc<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.52 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Set of points<br />

The set of points shape can be used to cover individual grid points. This is especially useful<br />

when a few grid points at the edge of an application field or next to a generated shape<br />

must be excluded for calculation by <strong>Calculux</strong>. It only has effect when real grid positions<br />

are excluded. A point can be entered between grid points but will have no effect.<br />

C<br />

A<br />

B<br />

Coordinates can be entered using the dialogue box. However, coordinates which are exactly<br />

on a grid point can also be entered simply by mouse-clicking on the grid point in the view<br />

box.<br />

Notes:<br />

• Points within 5mm from a grid point are taken as that grid point.<br />

• When the number of grid points is changed, it is possible that the selected points are no<br />

longer on a calculation point.<br />

Rectangle<br />

The rectangle shape can be used to create rectangular shapes. It is defined by its lower left<br />

corner position (relative to point A of the grid), width and length.<br />

C<br />

A<br />

B<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.53 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Furthermore, rotation around the starting point of the rectangle shape can be specified<br />

(see figure below).<br />

C<br />

30<br />

20<br />

90<br />

10<br />

45<br />

0<br />

A 10 20 30 40 B<br />

If the 'Change Proportionally' function is enabled, the position and size of the shape is<br />

changed proportionally with the size of the grid.<br />

Polygon<br />

The polygon shape can be used to create irregular shapes consisting of straight lines. At<br />

least three coordinates must be entered. The polygon is automatically closed by the<br />

program<br />

(first and last point are the same). All coordinates are relative to point A of the calculation<br />

grid. Lines within a polygon must not cross each other.<br />

Coordinates can be entered using the dialogue box. However, coordinates which are exactly<br />

on a grid point can also be entered simply by mouse-clicking on the grid point in the view<br />

box. Polygonal shapes can be set as inbound or outbound.<br />

Inbound<br />

C<br />

A<br />

B<br />

The default setting for the polygon shape is inbound. In this case the area covered by the<br />

inbound of the shape will be excluded from the calculations.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.54 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Outbound<br />

C<br />

A<br />

B<br />

Choose the Outbound Polygon option to create user-defined application fields that are<br />

polygonal shaped. The area covered by the outbound of the shape will be excluded from<br />

the calculations.<br />

Rotation<br />

If rotation is applied a polygonal shape is rotated around grid corner A (see figure below).<br />

C<br />

30<br />

20<br />

90<br />

10<br />

0<br />

A 10 20 30 40 B<br />

If the 'Change Proportionally' function is enabled, the position and size of the shape is<br />

changed proportionally with the size of the grid.<br />

Arc<br />

The Arc shape can be used to create circular shapes. The arc shape is defined by its starting<br />

position (relative to point A of the grid), radius and angle. The arc shape can be rotated<br />

around its starting position. Arc shape coordinates between grid points can only be entered<br />

using the dialogue box. The arc shape can be set as inbound or outbound.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.55 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Inbound<br />

C<br />

A<br />

B<br />

The default setting for the arc shape is inbound for creating segments up to a full circle.<br />

The area covered by the inbound of the shape will be excluded from the calculations.<br />

Outbound<br />

C<br />

A<br />

B<br />

Choose the Outbound Arc option to create rounded corners or edges on user-defined<br />

application fields. The area covered by the outbound arc shape will be excluded from the<br />

calculations.<br />

3.10.3 Symmetry<br />

Symmetry is an optional specification that can be used to simplify individual shape entry<br />

when one or more shapes have a symmetrical orientation and/or position. If applied, the<br />

shape is duplicated on the opposite side of a line parallel to the AB axis or the AC axis,<br />

or it is duplicated to all quadrants. The user can specify the symmetry type (AB, AC, AB-<br />

AC or none) and the AB and AC origin (relative to point A of the grid).<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.56 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.11 <strong>Lighting</strong> control<br />

(Switching Modes / Light Regulation Factor)<br />

In many designs the lighting system must be flexible so that the lighting level can be<br />

adapted to suit the activities for which the facility is to be used. The <strong>Calculux</strong> '<strong>Lighting</strong><br />

control' feature enables you to dim luminaires or luminaire arrangements.<br />

When using a '<strong>Lighting</strong> Control' system you can:<br />

• Save energy<br />

When light sensors are used you can automatically dim luminaires in areas where the<br />

amount of daylight increases. By means of movement detectors you can automatically<br />

switch of luminaires when an area is not 'occupied'.<br />

In this way an energy saving of up to 70% can be achieved.<br />

• Increase the flexibility of the lighting installation<br />

When infrared remote control is available, the need for vertical wiring to wall switches is<br />

eliminated;<br />

Reduction of the installation costs;<br />

Less costly adaptations to the electrical system, when the furniture layout is changed.<br />

• Create more comfort for the user<br />

When pre-programmed lighting levels are available, the user can switch or regulate the<br />

lighting installation to the required lighting level.<br />

In <strong>Calculux</strong> you can create a '<strong>Lighting</strong> Control' system using:<br />

a) Switching Modes<br />

b) Light Regulation Factors<br />

3.11.1 Switching Modes<br />

A switching mode is a subset of luminaires which are in operation.<br />

For example, you can first generate a design for a conference room for video presentation<br />

and then by adding luminaires go on to generate a design for a conference situation. In this<br />

way the lighting level can be adapted to suit the activities for which the facility is to be<br />

used.<br />

3.11.2 Light Regulation Factor (LRF)<br />

This option enables you to dim luminaires or luminaire arrangements.<br />

By using this option you can save energy, increase the flexibility of the lighting installation<br />

or create more comfort for the user.<br />

The value of the light regulation factor is expressed in % of the lumen output of a<br />

luminaire.<br />

(There is no linear relation between the value of the light regulation factor and the power<br />

consumption of a luminaire. As a result of this, when light regulation factors are used,<br />

the power consumption of the luminaire can not be calculated. So in the cost calculation<br />

the energy costs will not be given.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.57 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.12 Drawings<br />

A drawing is a 2-dimensional shape which you can add to your lighting design. A drawing<br />

may be a rectangle, arc, line or text.<br />

It is unlikely that you will need to add a drawing within an application field, as all the<br />

required areas are automatically included. You are more likely to place a drawing outside<br />

an application field to to illustrate your design (e.g. to represent a nearby construction).<br />

Be aware that if you move the centre coordinates of an application field, the drawing<br />

you've added will not move.<br />

Drawings appear on screen and in your printed reports if selected, but do not affect your<br />

calculations or scaling.<br />

The name and dimensions must be entered before a drawing can be included in a project.<br />

The exception is the text option. For this drawing, entering the name, the XYZ coordinates<br />

of where the centre of the text should be and the actual text is all that is required.<br />

You may wish to use a rectangular drawing e.g. for indication of luminaire positions,<br />

desks, conference tables, obstructions etc.<br />

(A drawing does not affect the scaling of project overviews, calculation result views and the<br />

results of calculations.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.58 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.13 Light-technical Calculations<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> currently supports the following calculation type:<br />

• Plane illuminance<br />

• Unified Glare Rating<br />

3.13.1 Plane Illuminance<br />

This is the ratio of the luminous flux<br />

incident on an infinitely small flat surface to<br />

the area of that surface.<br />

The surface can have any orientation.<br />

The orientation is defined by the normal<br />

vector on the surface.<br />

Z<br />

γ<br />

I p<br />

d<br />

Y<br />

n<br />

α<br />

P<br />

X<br />

The plane illuminance (from one light source) at point P on the calculation grid is given<br />

by:<br />

Ip<br />

E p =<br />

d<br />

Cos 2<br />

α<br />

Variables:<br />

E p<br />

I p<br />

d<br />

α<br />

Meaning:<br />

Plane illuminance at point P<br />

Luminous intensity from the light source in the direction of point P<br />

Distance from the source to point P (m)<br />

Angle between the normal n and the light incidence<br />

This formula assumes that the luminaire is a point source. For fluorescent luminaires,<br />

of which the distance between the luminaire and the point P is short in comparison with<br />

dimensions of the luminaire, the above formula is not valid. <strong>Calculux</strong> has a built-in feature<br />

(luminaire split-up) which overcomes this problem. When the luminaire split-up feature is<br />

activated, the luminaire is considered to be made up of a number of smaller luminaires with<br />

the same light distribution but proportionally smaller lumen output.<br />

The following types of surface orientation information relating to each point on the grid<br />

are recognised by <strong>Calculux</strong>.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.59 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

a) The surface orientation of each point on the grid can be in one of the main directions of<br />

the XYZ coordinate system:<br />

Hor +Z<br />

Horizontal +Z grid point.<br />

The surfaces in the grid points, used in the<br />

calculation, are orientated towards the<br />

positive Z direction.<br />

Z<br />

15 35<br />

Y<br />

20 35<br />

X<br />

(The surfaces are infinitely small planes (one in each grid point) on which the light<br />

calculations are being performed.<br />

Hor -Z<br />

Horizontal -Z grid point.<br />

The surfaces in the grid points, used in the<br />

calculation, are orientated towards the<br />

negative Z direction.<br />

Z<br />

15 35<br />

Y<br />

20 35<br />

X<br />

Vert +X<br />

Vertical +X grid point.<br />

The surfaces used in the calculation are<br />

orientated towards the positive X direction.<br />

Z<br />

Y<br />

15 35<br />

20 35<br />

X<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.60 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Vert -X<br />

Vertical -X grid point.<br />

The surfaces in the grid points, used in the<br />

calculation, are orientated towards the<br />

negative X direction.<br />

Z<br />

15 35<br />

Y<br />

20 35<br />

X<br />

Vert +Y<br />

Vertical +Y grid point.<br />

The surfaces in the grid points, used in the<br />

calculation, are orientated towards the<br />

positive Y direction.<br />

Z<br />

15 35<br />

Y<br />

20 35<br />

X<br />

Vert -Y<br />

Vertical -Y grid point.<br />

The surfaces in the grid points, used in the<br />

calculation, are orientated towards the<br />

negative Y direction.<br />

Z<br />

15 35<br />

Y<br />

20 35<br />

X<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.61 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

b) The surface orientation is parallel to the plane that passes through the grid points.<br />

This enables the illuminance to be calculated on two sides of the plane through the grid<br />

points:<br />

Surface +N<br />

Surface +N grid point.<br />

The surfaces in the grid points, used in the<br />

calculation, are orientated parallel to the<br />

plane which passes through the grid points<br />

in positive N direction.<br />

Z<br />

n<br />

20 60<br />

C<br />

Y<br />

A<br />

35 70<br />

B<br />

X<br />

Surface -N<br />

Surface -N grid point.<br />

The surfaces in the grid points, used in the<br />

calculation, are orientated parallel to the<br />

plane which passes through the grid points<br />

in negative N direction.<br />

Z<br />

n<br />

n-<br />

20 60<br />

C<br />

Y<br />

A B<br />

35 70<br />

X<br />

3.13.2 Glare<br />

Glare is the condition of vision in which there is a reduction in the ability to see details or<br />

objects due to an unsuitable distribution or range of luminance, or to extreme contrasts.<br />

Glare can occur in one of two possible forms:<br />

• Disability glare glare that impairs the vision;<br />

• Discomfort glare glare that induces a feeling of discomfort.<br />

For indoor <strong>Lighting</strong> the measure for discomfort glare is called the UGR factor.<br />

UGR is explained in the following section.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.62 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

UGR<br />

The Unified Glare Rating, UGR, is a measure for the amount of discomfort glare in an<br />

indoor lighting installation. A lower glare rating results in a better glare restriction. The<br />

practical meaning of the range of the glare assessment scale is from 10 (unnoticeable) to 30<br />

(unbearable).<br />

For the calculation of the UGR the CIE formula is used:<br />

UGR = 8 log{0.25/Lb L 2 ω/p 2 }<br />

Variables:<br />

UGR<br />

Lb<br />

L<br />

ω<br />

p<br />

Meaning:<br />

unified glare rating.<br />

background luminance, determined by the lighting, the room size and<br />

the reflectances. It is calculated from the vertical illuminance caused by<br />

interreflections on the observer's eye.<br />

luminance of the luminaire in the direction of the observer's eye.<br />

solid angle of the luminous parts of the luminaire as seen by the<br />

observer.<br />

position index of the luminaire (a value given by CIE typical for the<br />

displacement of the luminaire from the line of sight).<br />

To get insight in the overall effect of glare from a lighting installation, an UGR calculation<br />

for reference conditions as specified in the CIE tabular method is most suitable.<br />

The resulting single value (called in <strong>Calculux</strong> UGRCIE), is the value against which<br />

specifications can easily be checked.<br />

For detailed glare rating evaluations, <strong>Calculux</strong> has also the possibility to calculate UGR<br />

values for non-reference conditions. In this case the observers are situated in a given grid at<br />

each grid point. For four mutual perpendicular viewing directions with parallel and<br />

crosswise view, individual UGR values can be calculated. The line of sight is always<br />

horizontal and<br />

the eye height is given by the grid parameters.<br />

CIE tabular method reference conditions for UGR<br />

CIE specifies reference conditions (according to the tabular method) for the calculation of<br />

UGR. The resulting single UGR value is called in <strong>Calculux</strong> UGRCIE tabular method. It is<br />

the most typical value for the overall effect of glare from the total lighting installation.<br />

The reference conditions are:<br />

• Luminaire geometry: luminaire spacing in both directions 0.25 H, with H being the vertical<br />

distance between the observer eye and the luminaire.<br />

• Observer position: against the middle of the respective walls at 1.2 m above the floor<br />

with horizontal viewing directions perpendicular to the wall.<br />

(CIE's tabular method is not defined for complex situations. As a consequence also UGRCIE<br />

is not defined for such complex situations. <strong>Calculux</strong> will therefore only calculate UGRCIE<br />

for the following situations:<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.63 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

• Rectangular rooms<br />

• All luminaires of the same type and at the same height<br />

• All luminaires positioned parallel to the walls<br />

• Luminaires not asymmetrical or tilted.<br />

In all other situations <strong>Calculux</strong> will print 'UGRCIE not defined'.<br />

UGR in a calculation point<br />

For each luminaire in the room, it's contribution to the Sum in the main formula is<br />

calculated.<br />

The calculation uses the formula:<br />

UGR contribution = L 2 ω/p 2<br />

The Luminance (L) and the solid angle ω are calculated by <strong>Calculux</strong>.<br />

P is taken from the Guth Position Index Table:<br />

Background luminance<br />

The background luminance, Lb, is defined as that uniform luminance of the whole<br />

surroundings which produces the same illuminance on a vertical plane at the observer's eye<br />

as the visual field under consideration excluding the glare sources. It may be obtained from<br />

the formula:<br />

Lb = Ei/π<br />

where Ei is the indirect illuminance at the eye of the observer (lux).<br />

The indirect illuminance is the illuminance on the eye caused by the luminance of the<br />

walls (direct illuminance from the light sources is not taken in to account).<br />

Output<br />

The output format of the calculation of point values will be presented in a textual grid,<br />

analogous to <strong>Calculux</strong>'s vertical illuminance output.<br />

The values will be presented as rounded whole figures. The average, min/ave and min/max<br />

values are not calculated and will not be printed in this output.<br />

At the top of the output page the UGRCIE value will be presented, if defined.<br />

Also in the summary the UGRCIE values will be output per switching mode, that is, if they<br />

are defined and applicable.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.64 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.13.3 Indirect contribution<br />

The amount of light reaching a point depends on the direct contribution from the<br />

luminaires and on the indirect contribution reflected from the room's surfaces.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> calculates the indirect contribution by dividing the room's surfaces (cells)<br />

into a number of subsurfaces which are assumed to be area light sources with uniform<br />

radiance. The number of subsurfaces is defined with the 'interreflection accuracy level'<br />

which is set Room dialogue box. Since the total illuminance at a point includes the direct<br />

contribution plus the contribution of the subsurfaces, the more subsurfaces you have the<br />

more accurate your results will be.<br />

The direct contribution on each surface is calculated by placing a grid on each subsurface<br />

and deriving the incident illuminance from each luminaire according to the equation for<br />

the plane illuminance (see section 'Plane Illuminance'). The individual values are added up<br />

and averaged to give the total average illuminance on each surface.<br />

From the average direct contribution, the complete interreflection matrix is solved to<br />

calculate the average total radiance on each surface. Then from each surface the<br />

contribution to a point is calculated.<br />

When the room's surfaces are not divided into smaller subsurfaces, the so-called 6-plane<br />

interreflection model is used. This model corresponds to a normal interreflection accuracy<br />

level setting in the Room dialogue box.<br />

(The Indirect Contribution can only be calculated when the surfaces in the grid points,<br />

used in the calculation, are orientated towards the positive or negative X-,Y- or Z-direction.<br />

3.13.4 Calculating the numbers of luminaires needed<br />

When you add a luminaire from a database or PHILLUM file, <strong>Calculux</strong> can give you a<br />

quick estimation of the number of luminaires needed to provide the required illuminance<br />

level. The calculation is done according the so called Utilisation Factor (UF) method.<br />

Quick Estimation<br />

If you enter the required illuminance level (in the Room dialogue box), <strong>Calculux</strong> will be<br />

able to determine a quick estimation of the number of luminaires needed. This calculation<br />

is done for each luminaire individually and is performed according to the UF (Utilisation<br />

Factor) method described in CIE reports 40 and 52.<br />

N =<br />

E ∗ L ∗ W<br />

NL ∗ F ∗ MF ∗ UF<br />

Where the variables are:<br />

N = number of luminaires needed<br />

E = required illuminance<br />

L = room length<br />

W = room width<br />

NL = number of lamps in each luminaire<br />

Φ = lamp flux<br />

MF = maintenance factor<br />

UF = utilisation factor<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.65 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Utilisation Factor (UF)<br />

The Utilisation Factor is calculated according to the lumen method.<br />

This method uses the CIE flux code of the luminaire, the room's dimensions and the<br />

reflection properties of its surfaces to perform the calculation. The room's dimensions are<br />

characterised by the room index K, defined as:<br />

L ∗ W<br />

K =<br />

(H<br />

1<br />

- H<br />

0<br />

) ∗ (L + W)<br />

Where the variables are:<br />

L = room length<br />

W = room width<br />

H 1<br />

= room height<br />

= height of the working plane<br />

H 0<br />

The Utilisation Factor can be found when the room index and the reflectance of the room<br />

are known. They are tabulated as part of the luminaire photometric data. Strictly speaking,<br />

the UF method is only valid if the luminaire arrangement and the room dimensions are<br />

exactly the same as those in the CIE reports. However, experience shows that the values are<br />

valid for most practical situations.<br />

The UF method of calculating the number of luminaires is used as a rough indication.<br />

A point calculation can always be performed. For this reason <strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> only uses<br />

the CIE method of calculating the utilisation factor as the differences between it and other<br />

methods (DIN, CIBSE, etc.) are quite small. The table below shows an example of room<br />

index values for a typical luminaire.<br />

Utilisation Factor Table<br />

TBS 300/236 M6 2XTL-D36W/840<br />

Reflectances (%) for ceiling, walls and working plane<br />

room<br />

index<br />

80<br />

50<br />

80<br />

50<br />

70<br />

50<br />

70<br />

50<br />

70<br />

50<br />

70<br />

30<br />

50<br />

30<br />

50<br />

10<br />

30<br />

30<br />

30<br />

10<br />

0<br />

0<br />

K 30 10 30 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 0<br />

0.60<br />

0.80<br />

0.39<br />

0.46<br />

0.37<br />

0.44<br />

0.39<br />

0.46<br />

0.38<br />

0.44<br />

0.37<br />

0.43<br />

0.33<br />

0.39<br />

0.33<br />

0.39<br />

0.31<br />

0.37<br />

0.33<br />

0.39<br />

0.30<br />

0.36<br />

0.29<br />

0.35<br />

1.00 0.52 0.48 0.51 0.50 0.48 0.44 0.44 0.42 0.44 0.41 0.40<br />

1.25 0.57 0.52 0.56 0.54 0.52 0.49 0.48 0.46 0.48 0.46 0.45<br />

1.50 0.61 0.55 0.60 0.57 0.55 0.52 0.51 0.49 0.51 0.49 0.48<br />

2.00 0.66 0.59 0.65 0.62 0.59 0.57 0.26 0.54 0.55 0.54 0.52<br />

2.50 0.70 0.62 0.68 0.64 0.61 0.59 0.58 0.57 0.57 0.56 0.55<br />

3.00 0.72 0.63 0.70 0.66 0.63 0.61 0.60 0.59 0.59 0.58 0.57<br />

4.00 0.75 0.65 0.73 0.68 0.64 0.63 0.62 0.61 0.61 0.60 0.59<br />

5.00 0.76 0.66 0.74 0.69 0.65 0.64 0.63 0.62 0.62 0.61 0.60<br />

Suspension ratio: 0<br />

Calculated acc. to CIE publication 40<br />

LVW1077000-00<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.66 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Uniformity Check<br />

In some instances, the database contains information about the maximum advisable<br />

spacing to height ratios of luminaires which provide good uniformity. These values are<br />

taken into account in the Quick estimation and can sometimes lead to a greater number of<br />

luminaires than required to provide the average illuminance level.<br />

The uniformity check is restricted to checking the minimum numbers in length and width.<br />

This check is performed only if the luminaire maximum spacing to height ratio is given in<br />

the database.<br />

The uniformity check is based on the values as given in the data base. These values are<br />

calculated for a grid of 4 times 4 luminaires.<br />

The uniformity is calculated in the square of the middle four luminaires (as set out in<br />

CIBSE TM5).<br />

(In practical situations the above conditions are not always met.<br />

3.13.5 Quality Figures<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> allows you to show the quality figures of the calculations. Depending on the<br />

settings of the Quality Figure tab (see Calculation menu, Presentation...) the following<br />

quality figures can be displayed:<br />

Average value calculation<br />

The average value for a grid is worked out by adding the calculated values of each point<br />

and dividing it by the number of grid points (grid dimensions; AB, AC).<br />

Average =<br />

S calculated values for all idividual<br />

(Points AB) * (Points<br />

AC)<br />

points<br />

Minimum<br />

This is the minimum calculated value.<br />

Maximum<br />

This is the maximum calculated value.<br />

Minimum/maximum<br />

This is the minimum calculated value divided by the maximum calculated value.<br />

Minimum/average<br />

This is the minimum calculated value divided by the average calculated value.<br />

Unified Glare Rating according to the CIE tabular method (UGR CIE)<br />

This is the Unified Glare Rating under reference conditions as specified in the CIE tabular<br />

method.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.67 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.14 Report Setup<br />

A very useful feature of <strong>Calculux</strong> is the report facility. When you have completed a lighting<br />

project you can create attractive reports to present the results of the calculations to your<br />

customers. By means of the Report Setup you can simply specify the layout of the report<br />

and components you wish to include.<br />

For example, you can include, a table of contents, 2-D and 3-D project overviews, a<br />

summary, luminaire information (including Polar or Cartesian diagram) and/or financial<br />

data.<br />

For detailed information about your calculation results you can include the following<br />

presentation formats:<br />

• Textual Table;<br />

• Graphical Table;<br />

• Iso Contour;<br />

• Filled Iso Contour;<br />

• Mountain Plot.<br />

You can also include a summary of your findings and recommendations about the best<br />

lighting solutions. If you wish, you can produce reports in several languages.<br />

(The order of the calculation results can be altered (see Calculation Presentations dialogue<br />

box). However, the order of the presentation formats is governed by <strong>Calculux</strong> and cannot<br />

be altered.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> enables you also to print a report in portrait or landscape format with the 2D<br />

result views rotated 90°. This option (Report menu, Print Setup, Layout tab) can be very<br />

useful. For instance, when a report which has to be printed in portrait format contains a<br />

landscape formatted 2D result view which looks relatively small. By selecting 'Rotate<br />

presentation for Portrait Printing', the 2D result views will be rotated 90°. Because of the<br />

rotation the view can be enlarged.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.68 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.15 Cost Calculations<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> allows you to calculate the annual energy, investment, lamp and maintenance<br />

costs for the lighting installation in your project. You can view and/or enter the data for<br />

calculating the 'annual costs' and the 'total investment' costs of the project.<br />

3.15.1 Total Investment<br />

The Total Investment is the cost of the luminaires, lamps and the installation of the entire<br />

lighting project. The Total Investment costs are calculated according to the following<br />

formula:<br />

( ( ))<br />

Total_Inve stment = Σ NT * LPR + INSTC +<br />

lumtype<br />

( )<br />

LAPR * NL<br />

Variables:<br />

INSTC<br />

LAPR<br />

LPR<br />

NL<br />

NT<br />

Σ lumtype<br />

Meaning:<br />

Installation costs of the particular luminaire type;<br />

Lamp price for the particular luminaire type;<br />

Price of the particular luminaire type;<br />

Number of lamps for the particular luminaire;<br />

Number of luminaires of the particular type;<br />

Sum for all luminaires types.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.69 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.15.2 Annual costs<br />

The total annual costs are calculated according to the following formula:<br />

Total Annual Cost = EN + AI + LC + MC<br />

Variables:<br />

EN:<br />

AI:<br />

LC:<br />

MC:<br />

Meaning:<br />

Energy costs per year;<br />

Annual investments costs for the particular luminaire type;<br />

Lamp replacement costs per year;<br />

Maintenance costs per year.<br />

The formulas for these costs are:<br />

KWHPR<br />

EN = * Σ {{ Σ (NT * LWATT)}* BRNH }<br />

1000 swimod lumtype swimod<br />

swimod<br />

AI = AF * Σ {NT * (LPR + INSTC)}<br />

lumtype<br />

AF =<br />

1 - {1<br />

R 100<br />

[1 + R 100]}<br />

**N<br />

Σ {NT * NL * LAPR}<br />

lumtype<br />

LC =<br />

RP<br />

Σ {NT * MCL}<br />

lumtype<br />

MC =<br />

RP<br />

Variables: Meaning:<br />

AF<br />

the annuity factor;<br />

BRNH swimod<br />

the burning hours per year of the switching mode;<br />

INSTC the installation cost per luminaire for a particular luminaire type;<br />

KWHPR the kilowatt-hour price;<br />

LAPR<br />

the lamp price for a particular luminaire type;<br />

LPR<br />

the price per luminaire for a particular luminaire type;<br />

LWATT the total watts per luminaire for a particular luminaire type;<br />

MCL<br />

the maintenance cost per luminaire for a particular luminaire type;<br />

N<br />

the amortization period (years);<br />

NT<br />

the number of luminaires of a particular type;<br />

NT swimod<br />

the number of luminaires of a particular type per switching mode;<br />

NL<br />

the number of lamps per luminaire for a particular luminaire type;<br />

R the interest rate (%);<br />

RP<br />

the relamping period (years) for a particular luminaire type;<br />

the sum for all luminaire types.<br />

Σ lumtype<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.70 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

Cost calculations and light regulation factors<br />

There is no linear relation between the value of the light regulation factor and the power<br />

consumption of a luminaire. As a result of this, when light regulation factors are used, the<br />

power consumption of the luminaire can not be calculated. So in the cost calculation the<br />

energy costs will not be given.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.71 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Chapter 3 Background Information<br />

3.16 Maintenance Factor/New Value Factor<br />

The Maintenance Factor is the ratio of the average illuminance on the plane under<br />

investigation after a specified period of use of the lighting installation, to the average<br />

illuminance obtained under the same conditions for a new installation. It is always equal<br />

or less than 1 and is used as a multiplier for calculations, based on luminaire light<br />

distribution tables.<br />

In some countries the New Value Factor (or Inverse Maintenance Factor) is used.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> allows you to use new value factors instead of maintenance factors.<br />

The 'Inverse Maintenance Factor' is always more than or equal to 1.<br />

The following maintenance factors are specified:<br />

• General Project Maintenance Factor;<br />

• Luminaire Type Maintenance Factor;<br />

• Lamp Maintenance Factor.<br />

3.16.1 General Project Maintenance Factor<br />

This maintenance factor takes into account a general factor with which all calculation<br />

results are multiplied. It acts as a safeguarding factor and must reflect the overall<br />

conditions of the room surfaces. The value of the 'Project Maintenance Factor' is always<br />

equal or less than 1.<br />

3.16.2 Luminaire Type Maintenance Factor<br />

This maintenance factor takes into account the reduction of light output caused by dirt<br />

deposited on or in a luminaire. The rate at which the dirt is deposited depends on the<br />

construction of the luminaire and the extent of what dirt is present in the environment.<br />

The value of the 'Luminaire Type Maintenance Factor' is always equal or less than 1.<br />

3.16.3 Lamp Maintenance Factor<br />

The Lamp Maintenance Factor value is always equal or less than 1 and consists of two<br />

elements:<br />

a) Lamp Survival Factor;<br />

b) Lamp Lumen Depreciation Factor.<br />

a) Lamp Survival Factor<br />

This maintenance factor takes into account the percentage of the lamp failures during a<br />

specific number of operation hours. It is only applicable when a group replacement is to<br />

be carried out. The 'Lamp Survival Factor' is based on the assumptions about the switching<br />

cycle, supply voltage and control gear.<br />

b) Lamp Lumen Depreciation Factor.<br />

This maintenance factor takes into account the fact that the luminous output of all lamps<br />

decreases with use.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- 3.72 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 1<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 1<br />

My First Project<br />

1 My First Project<br />

1.1 General<br />

This tutorial will take you through the process of creating a new <strong>Indoor</strong> lighting project.<br />

You will create a project, enter general project data, specify a room, perform a calculation<br />

and print a report. What the results of the print job of 'My First Project' should look like<br />

can be seen in appendix 1a.<br />

In 'My First Project' the following installation will be created:<br />

Room Specifications<br />

Room dimensions<br />

Width<br />

Length<br />

Height<br />

Working Plane Height<br />

3.50 m<br />

5.60 m<br />

2.70 m<br />

0.80 m<br />

Reflections<br />

Ceiling 0.50<br />

Walls 0.30<br />

Floor 0.10<br />

Position (of Left Front side of the room)<br />

X 0.0<br />

Y 0.0<br />

Required illuminance level<br />

General lighting<br />

300 lux on working plane<br />

Luminaire Specifications<br />

Luminaire type TBS600/135 C7-60<br />

Lamp type<br />

TL5 35W<br />

Project Maintenance<br />

Factor 0.80<br />

Assumptions<br />

Installation of <strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> has been successful;<br />

Vignettes have been installed;<br />

Phillum files have been installed;<br />

Database has been installed.<br />

Before you start 'My First Project' first you should check the default settings of <strong>Calculux</strong>.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A1.1 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 1<br />

My First Project<br />

1.2 Checking the default settings<br />

In this section you will check some default settings. By means of default settings you can<br />

specify parameters that affect all future projects (new defined luminaires, luminaire<br />

arrangements, calculations and/or reports, etc.). The default settings remain valid the next<br />

time <strong>Calculux</strong> is started and can be changed at any time. If you specify/set the most<br />

common used parameters, you eliminate the need to specify/set the same parameters every<br />

time you create a new project. The default settings can be entered by means of the Option<br />

menu and are saved in the configuration file of <strong>Calculux</strong>.<br />

Do not use the Option menu when you want use different parameters for one particular<br />

project only.<br />

For 'My First Project' you are going to check the following default settings:<br />

Environment (options)<br />

(default settings concerning the program environment)<br />

Report Setup Defaults<br />

(default settings concerning the contents and layout of<br />

the report)<br />

Calculation Presentation Defaults (default settings concerning the Calculation<br />

Presentation)<br />

1.2.1 Environment<br />

Select Environment from the Options menu.<br />

Select the Directories tab.<br />

Check the directory settings of the Project files, Phillum files and Vignette files.<br />

Select the Database tab.<br />

Check the directory settings of the Database files.<br />

Click OK to return to the Main View.<br />

The Environment Options only have to be set after installing <strong>Calculux</strong>.<br />

1.2.2 Report Setup Defaults<br />

Select Report Setup Defaults from the Options menu.<br />

Select the Contents tab.<br />

In the Included box, select the chapters to be included in the report.<br />

The following chapters should be displayed:<br />

Title Page;<br />

Table of Contents;<br />

Top Project Overview;<br />

Summary;<br />

Luminaire Details;<br />

Installation Data.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A1.2 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 1<br />

My First Project<br />

In the Presentation Forms box, select the presentation forms of the calculation presentation<br />

result views.<br />

Select<br />

Textual Table<br />

Iso Contour<br />

Filled Iso Contour<br />

Select the Layout tab.<br />

In the Project Luminaire Information box, select in which way the luminaire luminous<br />

intensity information is to be shown.<br />

Select<br />

Show Polar Diagram<br />

In the Installation Data box, select which elements are to be displayed in chapter<br />

'Installation Data' of the report.<br />

Select<br />

Show Aiming Angles<br />

In the General box, select which additional information is to be displayed and in which<br />

language the report is to be created.<br />

Select<br />

Show Page Number<br />

Show File Name<br />

Language 'UK'<br />

Click OK to return to the Main View.<br />

1.2.3 Calculation Presentation Defaults<br />

Select Calculation Presentation Defaults from the Options menu.<br />

Select the Presentation Forms tab.<br />

In this tab you can select the elements to be displayed in the calculation presentation result<br />

views.<br />

Select<br />

Select the General tab.<br />

Textual Table<br />

Iso Contour<br />

Filled Iso Contour<br />

In the Show box, select the elements to be displayed by default in the calculation<br />

presentation and report.<br />

Select<br />

Luminaires<br />

Luminaire Code<br />

Luminaire Legend<br />

Drawings<br />

Fill Color Legend<br />

Room<br />

Connected Field<br />

Connected Grid<br />

In the Iso Contour Method box, select which Iso Contour Method will be used by default for<br />

the calculation presentation.<br />

Select<br />

Relative<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A1.3 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 1<br />

My First Project<br />

Select the Scaling tab.<br />

In the Minimum Report Scale box.<br />

Select 10<br />

In the Sizing box, select the default sizing of the calculation presentation result views,<br />

select:<br />

Zoomed Relative to Grid:<br />

Factor 1.000<br />

By setting the above scaling, the size of the defined objects in the calculation presentation<br />

result overviews will be based on the size of the grid and the field. The size is determined<br />

by the 'Zoom Factor'.<br />

Click OK to return to the Main View.<br />

1.3 Starting a new Project<br />

In this section we will enter project data, perform a calculation and print a report.<br />

But before you can start entering project data you have to start a new project.<br />

Select New Project from the File menu.<br />

A new empty window will be created. You can maximize the view if you wish.<br />

1.4 Enter Project Information<br />

Select Project Info from the Data menu.<br />

In the Project tab you can enter project information, e.g.:<br />

Name<br />

My First Design<br />

Subname<br />

Example 1a<br />

Remarks<br />

General <strong>Lighting</strong> for my Office<br />

Room Dimensions:<br />

Width 3.5 m<br />

Length 5.6 m<br />

Height 2.7 m<br />

Designer<br />

'Your Name'<br />

In the Customer tab you can enter customer information, e.g.:<br />

Name<br />

'Your Customer Name'<br />

In the Company tab you can enter company information or select a vignette file.<br />

For 'My First Project' you will use a previous created vignette file containing the company<br />

information:<br />

Click<br />

Browse<br />

Select<br />

LiDAC vignet (assuming the standard<br />

vignettes are installed and the<br />

environment is set correctly).<br />

Click<br />

Accept<br />

Click OK to return to the Main View.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A1.4 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 1<br />

My First Project<br />

1.5 Setting Project Options<br />

Select Project Options from Data menu.<br />

For 'My First Project' the following Project Options have to be set:<br />

In the Calculation box:<br />

Disable (no checkmark)<br />

'Luminaire Splitup'<br />

Set 'Project Maintenance Factor' to: 0.80<br />

In general, for indoor lighting designs, the luminaire split-up is needed only for precise<br />

calculations, such as indirect lighting (uplighter).<br />

In the 2D View tab and 3D View tab:<br />

Disable<br />

'Aiming Arrows'.<br />

Click OK to return to the Main View.<br />

1.6 Specifing the Room<br />

Select Room from the Data menu.<br />

Select the Definition tab.<br />

In the Dimensions box, enter the dimensions of the room:<br />

Room Width<br />

3.50 m<br />

Room Length<br />

5.60 m<br />

Room Height<br />

2.70 m<br />

Working Plane Height 0.80 m<br />

In the Position box you can define the position of the Left Front corner of the room.<br />

By means of the 'Centre' button you can position the centre of the room in origin<br />

(x=0, y=0). For this project the position of the Left Front corner is 0,0.<br />

In the Quick Estimate box you can specify the requested illuminance level as general<br />

lighting. The value you specify will be used by <strong>Calculux</strong> to calculate the number of<br />

luminaires needed to meet the required Illuminance level.<br />

In the 'Required Illuminance Level field',<br />

enter<br />

300 lux<br />

Select the Interreflection tab.<br />

In the Interreflection Accuracy box you can specify the accuracy of the interreflection<br />

calculations.<br />

Select<br />

Normal<br />

Click OK to return to the Main View.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A1.5 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 1<br />

My First Project<br />

1.7 Selecting Project Luminaires<br />

To select Project Luminaires:<br />

a) select Project Luminaires from the Data menu or;<br />

b) click on Toolbar shortcut button .<br />

a) Selecting Project Luminaires from the Data menu<br />

Select Project Luminaires from the Data menu.<br />

Click Add and select Database.<br />

In the Application Area box you can select the application area(s) you want to use.<br />

Select<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Click Open.<br />

In the Add Project Luminaires dialogue box, select the family name and/or family code of the<br />

luminaire:<br />

Family Name<br />

TBS600<br />

Family Code<br />

TBS600<br />

By default both the family name and the family code are set to 'any' (no luminaires will be<br />

selected). Nevertheless, you should select 'any' for the family name if the family name is<br />

unknown or select 'any' for the family code if the family code is unknown.<br />

Select the housing and light distributor of the luminaire, select:<br />

Housing<br />

TBS600/135<br />

Light Distributor C7-60<br />

Click Add.<br />

Click OK, then Close (twice) to return to the Main View.<br />

OR<br />

b) Clicking on Toolbar shortcut button .<br />

Click on in the <strong>Calculux</strong> menu bar.<br />

Select the housing and light distributor of the luminaire, select:<br />

Housing<br />

TBS600/135<br />

Light Distributor C7-60<br />

Click Add.<br />

Click OK to return to the main View.<br />

If the luminaire is not in your database you can select another <strong>Indoor</strong> luminaire. If you<br />

wish you can view luminaire details by clicking on the Details button.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A1.6 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 1<br />

My First Project<br />

1.8 Positioning luminaires<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> allows you to position luminaires individually as well as in arrangements.<br />

For 'My First Project' you will create a Room Block arrangement. The number of<br />

luminaires needed will be calculated according to the utilization factor (UF factor).<br />

Select Arranged Luminaires from the Data menu.<br />

Click Add and select Room Block.<br />

In the UF Method box you can see that 3.5 luminaires is sufficient for the requested<br />

illuminance level of 300 lux as general lighting.<br />

Click Generate.<br />

A Room Block arrangement of 4 luminaires will be generated.<br />

In the Definition box enter the name of the arrangement, enter:<br />

Name<br />

General<br />

Click OK, then Close to return to the Main View.<br />

1.9 Defining a (calculation) grid<br />

Before a calculation can be performed a (calculation) grid has to be defined. You can<br />

define your own grid, define a grid according to a rule or use a preset grid.<br />

For this project you will use a preset grid.<br />

Select Grids from the Data menu.<br />

Click Add in the Grids dialogue box.<br />

In the Add Grid dialogue box, enter the name of the grid, enter:<br />

Name<br />

Working Plane<br />

In the Coupling box, select:<br />

Connected to<br />

Working Plane<br />

Click OK, then Close to return to the Main View.<br />

1.10 Performing a calculation<br />

All settings concerning the definition or presentation of a calculation for a specific project<br />

are performed in the Calculation menu. For 'My First Project' project you will use the<br />

default settings as set in section 1.2.3 (Calculation Presentation Defaults), so no settings<br />

have to be done.<br />

Select Show Results from the Calculation menu.<br />

The calculation will be performed.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A1.7 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 1<br />

My First Project<br />

1.11 Printing the report<br />

All settings concerning the contents and layout of a report for a specific project are<br />

normally done in the Report menu. For 'My First Project' project you will use the default<br />

settings as set in section 1.2.1 (Environment) and 1.2.2 (Report Setup Defaults), so no<br />

settings have to be done.<br />

Select Print Report from the File menu.<br />

Click OK in the Print dialogue box to print the report.<br />

The results of the print job of 'My First Project' can be seen in<br />

appendix 1a.<br />

1.12 Saving the project<br />

In case you wish to redesign the project later, it is advisable to save the project.<br />

Select Save from the File menu.<br />

Enter the file name, enter:<br />

File Name<br />

Office 1.cin<br />

Click OK to save the project.<br />

Select Exit from the File menu to close the program.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A1.8 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 2<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 2<br />

My Second Project<br />

1 My Second Project<br />

1.1 General<br />

In this tutorial furniture and additional lighting, such as task lighting and accent lighting<br />

will be added to the indoor lighting installation you have created in 'My First Project'.<br />

Due to windows in the back wall of the room two luminaires of the Room Block<br />

arrangement have to be moved.<br />

1.2 Open 'My First Project' and save it under a new name<br />

Select Open Project from the File menu.<br />

Select OFFICE 1.CIN and click OK.<br />

In de File menu, select Save As.<br />

In the File Name box, enter OFFICE 2.CIN and click OK.<br />

You are now working in OFFICE 2.CIN.<br />

1.3 Adding furniture<br />

By means of the Drawing function a bureau (desk), consisting of three elements, and a<br />

conference table will be placed in the room.<br />

Select Drawings from the Data menu.<br />

Placing the first bureau element (dimensions: 1.60m x 0.80m)<br />

Select Add Rectangle.<br />

In the Add Rectangle dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Bureau<br />

Position of the bottom left corner of the bureau element:<br />

X<br />

1.30 m<br />

Y<br />

3.10 m<br />

Z<br />

0.80 m<br />

Dimensions and orientation of the bureau:<br />

Length<br />

1.60 m<br />

Width<br />

0.80 m<br />

Rotation<br />

0.00 deg<br />

Click OK.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A2.1 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 2<br />

My Second Project<br />

Placing the second bureau element (dimensions: 0.80m x 0.80m)<br />

Select Add Rectangle.<br />

In the Add Rectangle dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Bureau corner<br />

Position of the bottom left corner of the bureau element:<br />

X<br />

1.30 m<br />

Y<br />

4.70 m<br />

Z<br />

0.80 m<br />

Dimensions and orientation of the bureau:<br />

Length<br />

0.80 m<br />

Width<br />

0.80 m<br />

Rotation<br />

0.00 deg<br />

Click OK.<br />

Placing the third bureau element (dimensions: 1.20m x 0.80m)<br />

Select Add Rectangle.<br />

In the Add Rectangle dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Bureau left<br />

Position of the bottom left corner of the bureau element:<br />

X<br />

0.10 m<br />

Y<br />

4.70 m<br />

Z<br />

0.80 m<br />

Dimensions and orientation of the bureau:<br />

Length<br />

0.80 m<br />

Width<br />

1.20 m<br />

Rotation<br />

0.00 deg<br />

Click OK.<br />

Placing the conference table (dimensions: 0.80m x 1.60m)<br />

Select Add Rectangle.<br />

In the Add Rectangle dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Conference table<br />

Position of the bottom left corner of the conference table:<br />

X<br />

1.70 m<br />

Y<br />

1.00 m<br />

Z<br />

0.80 m<br />

Dimensions and orientation of the conference table:<br />

Length<br />

0.80 m<br />

Width<br />

1.60 m<br />

Rotation<br />

0.00 deg<br />

Click OK, then Close.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A2.2 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 2<br />

My Second Project<br />

1.4 Selecting a Project Luminaire for task-and accent lighting<br />

Now task lighting for the desk and conference table and accent lighting for a painting will<br />

be added. For this project the MASTERLINE PLUS 20W 24D will be used.<br />

Click on Toolbar shortcut button .<br />

In the Add Project Luminaires dialogue box, select the family name, family code, housing<br />

and light distributor of the luminaire:<br />

Family Name<br />

REFLECTOR LAMPS<br />

Family Code<br />

HALOGEN<br />

Housing<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 20W<br />

Light distributor 24D<br />

Click Add, then OK.<br />

1.5 Repositioning of luminaires for general lighting<br />

Due to windows in the back wall of the room (wall at position Y = 5.6) the luminaires at<br />

the window side have to be moved closer towards the window side. There are two<br />

possibilities:<br />

Change the Y-spacing of the luminaires in the arrangement<br />

Select Arranged Luminaires from Data menu.<br />

In the Arrangements dialogue box, click Change.<br />

Select the Arrangement tab.<br />

In the Definition box, enter the Y-spacing of the luminaires:<br />

Change the Y-spacing from 2.80 to 3.40.<br />

Click OK, then Close.<br />

Change the position of the luminaires<br />

According to the arrangement rule, the luminaires in the Room Block arrangement can<br />

not be moved individually. In order to move individual luminaires, the Room Block<br />

arrangement has to be changed into a Free arrangement first.<br />

Select Arranged Luminaires from Data menu.<br />

In the Arrangements dialogue box, click Free, then click Yes.<br />

Now the Room Block arrangement is made into a Free arrangement.<br />

Click Change and select the Luminaire List tab.<br />

In the Luminaire List tab, enter the new positions of the luminaires:<br />

Change the Y-position of the luminaires in row 3 and 4 from 4.20 to 4.80.<br />

Click OK, then Close.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A2.3 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 2<br />

My Second Project<br />

1.6 Positioning luminaires for the task- and accent lighting<br />

Task lighting for the bureau<br />

In the Arrangements dialogue box, click Add and select Block.<br />

In the Arrangement tab, enter the name of the arrangement.<br />

Name<br />

Bureau<br />

In the Position A box, enter the position of the bottom left luminaire.<br />

Position<br />

X = 1.50 m, Y = 3.50 m, Z = 2.70 m<br />

In the Arrangement box, enter quantity and spacing of the luminaires.<br />

Number in AB: 2 X-spacing: 0.40 m<br />

Number in AC: 2 Y-spacing: 0.80 m<br />

Select the Luminaire Definition tab.<br />

In the Project Lumnaire box, select:<br />

Type<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 20W 24D<br />

Click Apply, then OK.<br />

Task lighting for the conference table<br />

In the Arrangements dialogue box, click Add and select Block.<br />

In the Arrangement tab, enter the name of the arrangement.<br />

Name<br />

Conference table<br />

In the Position A box, enter the position of the bottom left luminaire.<br />

Position<br />

X = 2.10 m, Y = 1.20 m, Z = 2.70 m<br />

In the Arrangement box, enter quantity and spacing of the luminaires.<br />

Number in AB: 2 X-spacing: 0.80 m<br />

Number in AC: 2 Y-spacing: 0.40 m<br />

Select the Luminaire Definition tab.<br />

In the Project Luminaire box, select:<br />

Type<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 20W 24D<br />

Click Apply, then OK.<br />

Accent lighting for the painting on the right wall<br />

In the Arrangements dialogue box, click Add and select Line.<br />

Select the Luminaire Definition tab.<br />

In the Project Luminaire box, enter:<br />

Type<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 20W 24D<br />

Click Apply.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A2.4 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 2<br />

My Second Project<br />

The warning 'Arrangement does not fit in the room' will appear on screen. This is caused<br />

while the default position of the luminaires is not within the room. You can use the View<br />

tab to check the position of the luminaires. In this case there is a luminaire on the left<br />

bottom corner of the room (X = 0.0,Y = 0.0). Click OK to return to the Arrangements<br />

dialogue box.<br />

Select the Arrangement tab and enter:<br />

Name<br />

Painting<br />

In the Line box, enter the position, quantity and spacing of the luminaires:<br />

First X = 2.75, Y = 3.25, Z = 2.65<br />

Last X = 2.75, Y = 4.25, Z = 2.65<br />

Number of Luminaires 2<br />

Spacing<br />

1.00 m<br />

- The rotation of the Line arrangement will be 90°.<br />

- To ensure that the luminaires fit into the room when they are tilted a luminaire height<br />

of 2.65 m is chosen (room height is 2.70 m).<br />

Now the luminaires have to be tilted to the wall:<br />

In the Luminaire List tab, enter the values for the tilt of both luminaires:<br />

Tilt90 = 40°<br />

Click OK, then Close.<br />

To show that the accent lighting is aimed to the wall, the 'aiming arrows' can be displayed<br />

in the project overview.<br />

Select Project Options from the Data menu.<br />

In the 2D View tab, check the Aiming Arrows box.<br />

Click OK.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A2.5 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 2<br />

My Second Project<br />

1.7 Define Calculation grids for the bureau, conference table<br />

and the right wall<br />

Select Grids from the Data menu.<br />

Grid on Bureau<br />

In the Grids dialogue box, click Add.<br />

In the Add Grid dialogue box, enter:<br />

Name<br />

Bureau<br />

In the Coupling box, select:<br />

Connected to<br />

None<br />

In the Definition box, enter the position of the grid points:<br />

Position<br />

A X = 1.3, Y = 3.1, Z = 0.8<br />

B X = 2.1, Y = 3.1, Z = 0.8<br />

C X = 1.3, Y = 4.7, Z = 0.8<br />

Number of Points<br />

in AB 4<br />

in AC 8<br />

Do not check 'Other Side'.<br />

Click OK.<br />

Grid on Conference table<br />

In the Grids dialogue box, click Add.<br />

In the Add Grid dialogue box, enter:<br />

Name<br />

Conference table<br />

In the Coupling box, select:<br />

Connected to<br />

None<br />

In the Definition box, enter the position of the grid points:<br />

Position<br />

A X = 1.7, Y = 1.0, Z = 0.8<br />

B X = 3.3, Y = 1.0, Z = 0.8<br />

C X = 1.7, Y = 1.8, Z = 0.8<br />

Number of Points<br />

in AB 8<br />

in AC 4<br />

Do not check 'Other Side'.<br />

Click OK.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A2.6 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 2<br />

My Second Project<br />

Grid on right wall<br />

In the Grids dialogue box, click Add.<br />

In the Add Grid dialogue box, enter:<br />

Name<br />

Right Wall<br />

In the Coupling box, select:<br />

Connected to<br />

Right wall<br />

Click OK, then Close.<br />

1.8 Defining Switching Modes<br />

The following four switching modes will be defined for this project:<br />

General lighting;<br />

Task lighting for bureau;<br />

Task lighting for table;<br />

Accent lighting for painting at right wall.<br />

Defining the name of the switching modes<br />

Select Switching Modes from the Data menu.<br />

In the Switching Modes dialogue box, enter the names of the switching modes.<br />

Enter General <strong>Lighting</strong>, then click New.<br />

Enter Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Bureau, then click New.<br />

Enter Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Table, then click New.<br />

Enter Accent <strong>Lighting</strong> Painting, then click OK.<br />

In this example project the General <strong>Lighting</strong> is always switched on.<br />

Selecting the luminaires to which the switching mode is applied<br />

Select Arranged Luminaires from the Data menu.<br />

Double click on 'Bureau' in the Arrangements dialogue box.<br />

Select the Luminaire Definition tab.<br />

In the Switching Modes box, check 'Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Bureau' only.<br />

Click Apply, then OK.<br />

Double click on 'Conference Table' in the Arrangements dialogue box.<br />

Select the Luminaire Definition tab.<br />

In the Switching Modes box, check 'Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Table' only.<br />

Click Apply, then OK.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A2.7 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 2<br />

My Second Project<br />

Double click on 'Painting' in the Arrangements dialogue box.<br />

Select the Luminaire Definition tab.<br />

In the Switching Modes box, check 'Accent <strong>Lighting</strong> Painting' only.<br />

Click Apply, then OK.<br />

Double click on 'General' in the Arrangements dialogue box.<br />

Select the Luminaire Definition tab.<br />

In the Switching Modes box, check 'General <strong>Lighting</strong>', 'Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Bureau', 'Task <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Table' and 'Accent <strong>Lighting</strong> Painting'.<br />

Click Apply, then OK.<br />

Click Close.<br />

1.9 Defining Calculations<br />

Before you can perform a calculation, you have to specify the calculation name and the<br />

calculation parameters first.<br />

Select Define from the Calculation menu.<br />

For this project the following calculations have to be defined:<br />

Working Plane<br />

Double click on 'Working Plane' in the Calculation dialogue box.<br />

In the Change Calculation dialogue box, check and/or select:<br />

Name<br />

Working Plane<br />

Grid<br />

Working Plane<br />

Switching Mode General <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Calculation Type Plane Illuminance<br />

Result Type Total (= Direct + Indirect contribution)<br />

Direction Surface +N<br />

Click OK.<br />

Bureau<br />

Double click on 'Bureau' in the Calculation dialogue box.<br />

In the Change Calculation dialogue box, check and/or select:<br />

Name<br />

Bureau<br />

Grid<br />

Bureau<br />

Switching Mode Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Bureau<br />

Calculation Type Plane Illuminance<br />

Result Type Total (= Direct + Indirect contribution)<br />

Direction Surface +N<br />

Click OK.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A2.8 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 2<br />

My Second Project<br />

Conference table<br />

Double click on 'Conference table' in the Calculation dialogue box.<br />

In the Change Calculation dialogue box, check and/or select:<br />

Name<br />

Conference Table<br />

Grid<br />

Conference Table<br />

Switching Mode Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Table<br />

Calculation Type Plane Illuminance<br />

Result Type Total (= Direct + Indirect contribution)<br />

Direction Surface +N<br />

Click OK.<br />

Right Wall<br />

Double click on 'Right Wall' in the Calculation dialogue box.<br />

In the Change Calculation dialogue box, check and/or select:<br />

Name<br />

Right Wall<br />

Grid<br />

Right Wall<br />

Switching Mode Accent <strong>Lighting</strong> Painting<br />

Calculation Type Plane Illuminance<br />

Result Type Total (= Direct + Indirect contribution)<br />

Direction Surface +N<br />

Click OK, then Close.<br />

1.10 Defining the Calculation Presentation<br />

Select Presentation from the Calculation menu.<br />

In the Include box, double click on the + or - sign to include (+) or exclude (-) a calculation.<br />

For this project Working Plane, Bureau, Conference table and Right Wall have to be<br />

included.<br />

In the Presentation Forms box, select in which presentation forms the calculation results of<br />

Working Plane, Bureau, Conference table and Right Wall are presented. Select:<br />

Textual Table;<br />

Filled Iso Contour.<br />

Set the options for calculation presentation of Bureau:<br />

In the Calculation Presentation dialogue box, select Bureau.<br />

Click Options.<br />

Select the General tab.<br />

In the Show box, set which attributes are shown in the calculation presentation.<br />

Disable (no cross) Unconnected Field<br />

Unconnected Grid<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A2.9 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 2<br />

My Second Project<br />

Select the Scaling tab.<br />

In the Minimum Report Scale box, select the scaling of the report, select:<br />

1: 10<br />

In the Sizing box, select:<br />

Zoomed Relative to Grid<br />

Factor 1.000<br />

Click OK.<br />

Set the options for calculation presentation of Conference table:<br />

In the Calculation Presentation dialogue box, select Conference table.<br />

Click Options.<br />

Select the General tab.<br />

In the Show box, set which attributes are shown in the calculation presentation.<br />

Disable (no cross) Unconnected Field<br />

Unconnected Grid<br />

Select the Scaling tab.<br />

In the Minimum Report Scale box, select the scaling of the report, select:<br />

1: 10<br />

In the Sizing box, select:<br />

Zoomed Relative to Grid<br />

Factor 1.000<br />

Click OK.<br />

Click OK to return to the Main View.<br />

1.11 Creating a report<br />

Enter new Project Information<br />

Before you create a report you should enter information about the project.<br />

This information will be printed on the title page of your report.<br />

Select Project Info from the Data menu.<br />

In the Project tab you can enter project information:<br />

Name<br />

My Second Design<br />

Subname<br />

Example 1b<br />

Date<br />

Press Update<br />

Remarks<br />

General <strong>Lighting</strong> for my Office<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A2.10 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 2<br />

My Second Project<br />

Room Dimensions:<br />

Width<br />

3.5 m<br />

Length<br />

5.6 m<br />

Height<br />

2.7 m<br />

Additional Task- and Accent <strong>Lighting</strong>.<br />

Click OK.<br />

Select which elements are to be displayed in the Top Project Overview of your report<br />

For this project the Grid points and Luminaire Code have not to be displayed.<br />

Select Project Options from the Data menu.<br />

Select the 2D View tab.<br />

In the Show box, Luminaire Code and Grids should not be checked (no cross).<br />

Click OK.<br />

Report Setup<br />

Select Setup from the Report menu.<br />

Select the Components tab.<br />

In the Components box, select which components have to be included in the report. Include:<br />

Include:<br />

Title Page<br />

Table of Contents<br />

Top Project Overview<br />

Summary<br />

Luminaire Details<br />

Installation Data<br />

In the Include box, double click on the + or - sign to include (+) or exclude (-) a calculation.<br />

For this project Working Plane, Bureau, Table and Right Wall have to be included.<br />

In the Presentation Forms box, select in which presentation forms the calculation results are<br />

presented. Select:<br />

Select:<br />

Graphical Table<br />

Iso Contour<br />

Filled Iso Contour<br />

Click OK.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A2.11 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 2<br />

My Second Project<br />

1.12 Printing the Report<br />

You can use Print Preview (see Report menu) to preview your report before printing it.<br />

Select Print Report from the File menu or Report menu.<br />

Click OK in the Print dialogue box to print the report.<br />

1.13 Saving the project<br />

In case you wish to redesign the project later, it is advisable to save the project.<br />

Select Save from the File menu to save the project.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A2.12 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

1 My Third Project<br />

1.1 General<br />

In this project you will make a lighting design for a director room.<br />

The design will contain Indirect, Curtain, Painting, Whiteboard, Desk, Conference and<br />

Accent lighting. The luminaires will be mounted in or on a system ceiling (0.6 m x 0.6 m<br />

modules).<br />

Room Specifications<br />

Room dimensions:<br />

Width<br />

4.70 m<br />

Length<br />

7.50 m<br />

Height 2.70 m (= height of the system ceiling)<br />

Room reflectances:<br />

Windows (on the left) 0.10<br />

Other walls 0.30<br />

Ceiling 0.70<br />

Floor 0.10<br />

Following luminaire types will be used:<br />

Task TPH601/128 C7-60 and TBS630/314 C7-60<br />

Conference TPH601/128 MD and<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 35W 10D<br />

Curtain and Cupboard FBS145/118<br />

Painting MASTERLINE PLUS 50W 24D<br />

Whiteboard MASTERLINE PLUS 50W 38D<br />

Indirect<br />

QFG101/300<br />

1.2 Starting a new Project<br />

• Select New Project from the File menu.<br />

A new empty window will be created. You can maximize the view if you wish.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.1 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

1.3 Entering Project Information and Project Options<br />

• Select Project Info from the Data menu.<br />

In the Project tab you can enter project information, e.g.:<br />

Name<br />

Director room<br />

Subname Example 3<br />

Remarks<br />

Design for desk, conference and presentation<br />

lighting using light regulation factors<br />

(LRF).<br />

Designer<br />

'Your Name'<br />

• In the Customer tab you can enter customer information, e.g.:<br />

Name<br />

'Your Customer Name'<br />

• In the Company tab you can enter company information.<br />

• Click OK.<br />

• Select Project Options from the Data menu.<br />

• Select the General tab.<br />

In the Calculations box, enter:<br />

Project Maintenance Factor 0.80<br />

• Click OK.<br />

1.4 Specifing the Room<br />

• Select Room from Data Menu.<br />

Select the Definition tab.<br />

In the Dimensions box, enter the dimensions of the room:<br />

Room Width<br />

4.70 m<br />

Room Length<br />

7.50 m<br />

Room Height<br />

2.70 m<br />

Working Plane Heigh 0.80 m<br />

In the Position box, enter the position of the Front Bottom Left corner of the room:<br />

Front Bottom Left X = 0.00 m<br />

Y = -3.75 m<br />

( The Y= 0 axis is the middle of the room.<br />

In Reflectances box, select Presets and<br />

double click on: 0.70 – 0.30 – 0.10<br />

Due to the windows and curtain the value of the reflectance of the left wall has to be<br />

changed. Enter:<br />

Left 0.10<br />

• Click OK.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.2 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

1.5 Adding a door, windows and furniture to the room<br />

By means of the Drawing function, two windows, a door, a painting, a whiteboard, a desk, a<br />

computer desk, a cupboard and a conference table will be added to the room.<br />

• Select Drawings from the Data menu.<br />

1.5.1 Adding the windows and door<br />

• Click Add, then select Rectangle.<br />

In the Add Rectangle dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name Window 1<br />

X<br />

0.00 m<br />

Y<br />

-3.45 m<br />

Z<br />

1.00 m<br />

Length<br />

3.30 m<br />

Width<br />

0.10 m<br />

Rotation<br />

0.00 deg<br />

• Click OK.<br />

• Click Duplicate.<br />

In the Add Rectangle dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name Window 2<br />

X<br />

0.00 m<br />

Y<br />

0.15 m<br />

Z<br />

2.10 m<br />

Length<br />

3.30 m<br />

Width<br />

0.10 m<br />

Rotation<br />

0.00 deg<br />

• Click OK.<br />

• Click Add, then select Rectangle.<br />

In the Add Rectangle dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Door<br />

X<br />

4.60 m<br />

Y<br />

2.60 m<br />

Z<br />

2.10 m<br />

Length<br />

0.80 m<br />

Width<br />

0.10 m<br />

Rotation<br />

0.00 deg<br />

• Click OK.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.3 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

1.5.2 Adding a Painting and Whiteboard<br />

• Click Add, then select Rectangle.<br />

In the Add Rectangle dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Painting<br />

X<br />

1.10 m<br />

Y<br />

-3.75 m<br />

Z<br />

1.60 m<br />

Length<br />

0.05 m<br />

Width<br />

0.80 m<br />

Rotation<br />

0.00 deg<br />

• Click OK.<br />

• Click Add, then select Rectangle.<br />

In the Add Rectangle dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Whiteboard<br />

X<br />

1.80 m<br />

Y<br />

3.70 m<br />

Z<br />

1.20 m<br />

Length<br />

0.05 m<br />

Width<br />

1.20 m<br />

Rotation<br />

0.00 deg<br />

• Click OK.<br />

1.5.3 Adding the furniture<br />

• Click Add, then select Rectangle.<br />

In the Add Rectangle dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Bureau<br />

X<br />

2.30 m<br />

Y<br />

-3.00 m<br />

Z<br />

0.80 m<br />

Length<br />

1.80 m<br />

Width<br />

0.80 m<br />

Rotation<br />

0.00 deg<br />

• Click OK.<br />

• Click Add, then select Rectangle.<br />

In the Add Rectangle dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Computer Table<br />

X<br />

3.10 m<br />

Y<br />

-2.00 m<br />

Z<br />

0.80 m<br />

Length<br />

0.80 m<br />

Width<br />

0.80 m<br />

Rotation<br />

0.00 deg<br />

• Click OK.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.4 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

• Click Add, then select Rectangle.<br />

In the Add Rectangle dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Cupboard<br />

X<br />

4.10 m<br />

Y<br />

0.60 m<br />

Z<br />

1.50 m<br />

Length<br />

1.20 m<br />

Width<br />

0.60 m<br />

Rotation<br />

0.00 deg<br />

• Click OK.<br />

• Click Add, then select Rectangle.<br />

In the Add Rectangle dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Conference Table<br />

X<br />

1.00 m<br />

Y<br />

0.70 m<br />

Z<br />

0.80 m<br />

Length<br />

2.20 m<br />

Width<br />

1.00 m<br />

Rotation<br />

0.00 deg<br />

• Click OK.<br />

1.6 Drawing the system ceiling<br />

In this section the system ceiling (0.60 m x 0.60 m modules) will be added to the room.<br />

While this version of <strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> has no special drawing feature for system ceilings,<br />

each line of the system ceiling has to be drawn separately.<br />

1.6.1 Drawing the lines in Y-direction (line spacing 0.60 m)<br />

• Click Add, then select Line.<br />

In the Add Line dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Ceiling, line h1<br />

Point A X = 0.10, Y = -3.30, Z = 2.70<br />

Point B X = 4.70, Y = -3.30, Z = 2.70<br />

• Click OK, then Duplicate.<br />

• In the Add Line dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Ceiling, line h2<br />

Point A X = 0.10, Y = -2.70, Z = 2.70<br />

Point B X = 4.70, Y = -2.70, Z = 2.70<br />

• Click OK, then Duplicate.<br />

• In the Add Line dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Ceiling, line h3<br />

Point A X = 0.10, Y = -2.10, Z = 2.70<br />

Point B X = 4.70, Y = -2.10, Z = 2.70<br />

• Click OK, then Duplicate.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.5 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

• In the Add Line dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Ceiling, line h4<br />

Point A X = 0.10, Y = -1.50, Z = 2.70<br />

Point B X = 4.70, Y = -1.50, Z = 2.70<br />

• Click OK, then Duplicate.<br />

• In the Add Line dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Ceiling, line h5<br />

Point A X = 0.10, Y = -0.90, Z = 2.70<br />

Point B X = 4.70, Y = -0.90, Z = 2.70<br />

• Click OK, then Duplicate.<br />

• In the Add Line dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Ceiling, line h6<br />

Point A X = 0.10, Y = -0.30, Z = 2.70<br />

Point B X = 4.70, Y = -0.30, Z = 2.70<br />

• Click OK, then Duplicate.<br />

• In the Add Line dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Ceiling, line h7<br />

Point A X = 0.10, Y = 0.30, Z = 2.70<br />

Point B X = 4.70, Y = 0.30, Z = 2.70<br />

• Click OK, then Duplicate.<br />

• In the Add Line dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Ceiling, line h8<br />

Point A X = 0.10, Y = 0.90, Z = 2.70<br />

Point B X = 4.70, Y = 0.90, Z = 2.70<br />

• Click OK, then Duplicate.<br />

• In the Add Line dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Ceiling, line h9<br />

Point A X = 0.10, Y = 1.50, Z = 2.70<br />

Point B X = 4.70, Y = 1.50, Z = 2.70<br />

• Click OK, then Duplicate.<br />

• In the Add Line dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Ceiling, line h10<br />

Point A X = 0.10, Y = 2.10, Z = 2.70<br />

Point B X = 4.70, Y = 2.10, Z = 2.70<br />

• Click OK, then Duplicate.<br />

• In the Add Line dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Ceiling, line h11<br />

Point A X = 0.10, Y = 2.70, Z = 2.70<br />

Point B X = 4.70, Y = 2.70, Z = 2.70<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.6 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

• Click OK, then Duplicate.<br />

• In the Add Line dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Ceiling, line h12<br />

Point A X = 0.10, Y = 3.30, Z = 2.70<br />

Point B X = 4.70, Y = 3.30, Z = 2.70<br />

• Click OK.<br />

1.6.2 Drawing the lines in X-direction (line spacing 0.60 m)<br />

• Click Add, then select Line.<br />

In the Add Line dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Ceiling, line v1<br />

Point A X = 0.60, Y = -3.75, Z = 2.70<br />

Point B X = 0.60, Y = 3.75, Z = 2.70<br />

• Click OK, then Duplicate.<br />

• In the Add Line dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Ceiling, line v2<br />

Point A X = 1.20, Y = -3.75, Z = 2.70<br />

Point B X = 1.20, Y = 3.75, Z = 2.70<br />

• Click OK, then Duplicate.<br />

• In the Add Line dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Ceiling, line v3<br />

Point A X = 1.80, Y = -3.75, Z = 2.70<br />

Point B X = 1.80, Y = 3.75, Z = 2.70<br />

• Click OK, then Duplicate.<br />

• In the Add Line dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Ceiling, line v4<br />

Point A X = 2.40, Y = -3.75, Z = 2.70<br />

Point B X = 2.40, Y = 3.75, Z = 2.70<br />

• Click OK, then Duplicate.<br />

• In the Add Line dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Ceiling, line v5<br />

Point A X = 3.00, Y = -3.75, Z = 2.70<br />

Point B X = 3.00, Y = 3.75, Z = 2.70<br />

• Click OK, then Duplicate.<br />

• In the Add Line dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Ceiling, line v6<br />

Point A X = 3.60, Y = -3.75, Z = 2.70<br />

Point B X = 3.60, Y = 3.75, Z = 2.70<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.7 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

• Click OK.<br />

• In the Add Line dialogue box, set the following parameters:<br />

Name<br />

Ceiling, line v7<br />

Point A X = 4.20, Y = -3.75, Z = 2.70<br />

Point B X = 4.20, Y = 3.75, Z = 2.70<br />

• Click OK, then Close.<br />

1.7 Selecting Project Luminaires<br />

• Click on Toolbar shortcut button .<br />

In the Add Project Luminaires dialogue box, select following luminaires:<br />

Family Name<br />

TBS630<br />

Family Code<br />

TBS630<br />

Housing<br />

TBS630/314<br />

Light distributor C7-60<br />

• Click Add, select:<br />

Family Name<br />

TPH601<br />

Family Code<br />

TPH601<br />

Housing<br />

TPH601/128<br />

Light distributor C7-60<br />

• Click Add, select:<br />

Family Name<br />

Family Code<br />

Housing<br />

Light distributor<br />

• Click Add, select:<br />

Family Name<br />

Family Code<br />

Housing<br />

Light distributor<br />

• Click Add, select:<br />

Family Name<br />

Family Code<br />

Housing<br />

Light distributor<br />

• Click Add, select:<br />

Family Name<br />

Family Code<br />

Housing<br />

Light distributor<br />

• Click Add, select:<br />

Family Name<br />

Family Code<br />

Housing<br />

Light distributor<br />

TPH601<br />

TPH601<br />

TPH601/128<br />

MD<br />

FBS145<br />

FBS145<br />

FBS145/118<br />

(none)<br />

REFLECTOR LAMPS<br />

HALOGEN<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 35W 10D<br />

10D<br />

REFLECTOR LAMPS<br />

HALOGEN<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 50W 24D<br />

10D<br />

REFLECTOR LAMPS<br />

HALOGEN<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 50W 38D<br />

38D<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.8 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

• Click Add, select:<br />

Family Name<br />

Family Code<br />

Housing<br />

Light distributor<br />

QFG101<br />

QFG101<br />

QFG101/300<br />

(none)<br />

• Click OK.<br />

1.8 Defining the (calculation) grids<br />

Now the (calculation) grids for the Working Plane, Floor, Curtain, Bureau, Conference<br />

Table, Painting and Whiteboard will be defined.<br />

( For this project the grid points do not have to be displayed in the 2D project overviews.<br />

Therefore, the 'Show Grid option' has to be disabled in the Project Options.<br />

1.8.1 Excluding the grid points from the 2D project overviews<br />

• Select Project Options from the Data menu.<br />

• Select the 2D View tab.<br />

In the Show box, disable (no cross) Grids.<br />

• Click OK.<br />

1.8.2 Defining the grid for the Working Plane<br />

• Select Grids from Data menu.<br />

• Click Add in the Grids dialogue box.<br />

• In the Add Grid dialogue box, enter the name of the grid.<br />

Name<br />

Working Plane<br />

In the Coupling box, select:<br />

Connected to<br />

None<br />

In the Definition box, enter the position of the grid points:<br />

Position<br />

A X = 0.30, Y = -3.60, Z = 0.80<br />

B X = 4.50, Y = -3.60, Z = 0.80<br />

C X = 0.30, Y = 3.60, Z = 0.80<br />

Number of Points<br />

in AB 8<br />

in AC 13<br />

• Click OK.<br />

( The grid of the Working plane is not connected to 'Working Plane', but user defined. This is<br />

done because the grid points have to be in the middle of the system ceiling.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.9 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

1.8.3 Defining the grid for the Floor<br />

• Click Add in the Grids dialogue box.<br />

• In the Add Grid dialogue box, enter the name of the grid.<br />

Name<br />

Floor<br />

In the Coupling box, select:<br />

Connected to<br />

None<br />

In the Definition box, enter the position of the grid points:<br />

Position<br />

A X = 0.25, Y = -3.50, Z = 0.00<br />

B X = 4.50, Y = -3.50, Z = 0.00<br />

C X = 0.25, Y = 3.50, Z = 0.00<br />

Number of Points<br />

in AB 9<br />

in AC 15<br />

( The grid of the Floor is not connected to 'Working Plane', but user defined.<br />

• Click OK.<br />

1.8.4 Defining the grid for the Curtain<br />

• Click Add in the Grids dialogue box.<br />

• In the Add Grid dialogue box, enter the name of the grid.<br />

Name<br />

Curtain<br />

In the Coupling box, select:<br />

Connected to<br />

None<br />

In the Definition box, enter the position of the grid points:<br />

Position<br />

A X = 0.00, Y = -3.30, Z = 0.25<br />

B X = 0.00, Y = 3.30, Z = 0.25<br />

C X = 0.00, Y = -3.30, Z = 2.50<br />

Number of Points<br />

in AB 12<br />

in AC 10<br />

• Click OK.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.10 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

1.8.5 Defining the grid for the Bureau<br />

• Click Add in the Grids dialogue box.<br />

• In the Add Grid dialogue box, enter the name of the grid.<br />

Name<br />

Bureau<br />

In the Coupling box, select:<br />

Connected to<br />

None<br />

In the Definition box, enter the position of the grid points:<br />

Position<br />

A X = 2.30, Y = -3.00, Z = 0.80<br />

B X = 3.10, Y = -3.00, Z = 0.80<br />

C X = 2.30, Y = -1.20, Z = 0.80<br />

Number of Points<br />

in AB 5<br />

in AC 10<br />

• Click OK.<br />

1.8.6 Defining the grid for the Conference Table<br />

• Click Add in the Grids dialogue box.<br />

• In the Add Grid dialogue box, enter the name of the grid.<br />

Name<br />

Conference Table<br />

In the Coupling box, select:<br />

Connected to<br />

None<br />

In the Definition box, enter the position of the grid points:<br />

Position<br />

A X = 1.00, Y = 0.70, Z = 0.80<br />

B X = 2.00, Y = 0.70, Z = 0.80<br />

C X = 1.00, Y = 2.90, Z = 0.80<br />

Number of Points<br />

in AB 5<br />

in AC 12<br />

• Click OK.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.11 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

1.8.7 Defining the grid for the Painting<br />

• Click Add in the Grids dialogue box.<br />

• In the Add Grid dialogue box, enter the name of the grid.<br />

Name<br />

Painting<br />

In the Coupling box, select:<br />

Connected to<br />

None<br />

In the Definition box, enter the position of the grid points:<br />

Position<br />

A X = 1.10, Y = -3.70, Z = 1.50<br />

B X = 1.70, Y = -3.70, Z = 1.50<br />

C X = 1.10, Y = -3.70, Z = 1.90<br />

Number of Points<br />

in AB 5<br />

in AC 5<br />

• Click OK.<br />

1.8.8 Defining the grid for the Whiteboard<br />

• Click Add in the Grids dialogue box.<br />

• In the Add Grid dialogue box, enter the name of the grid.<br />

Name<br />

Whiteboard<br />

In the Coupling box, select:<br />

Connected to<br />

None<br />

In the Definition box, enter the position of the grid points:<br />

Position<br />

A X = 1.80, Y = 3.70, Z = 1.20<br />

B X = 3.00, Y = 3.70, Z = 1.20<br />

C X = 1.80, Y = 3.70, Z = 2.10<br />

Number of Points<br />

in AB 8<br />

in AC 7<br />

• Click OK, then Close.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.12 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

1.9 Defining Switching Modes<br />

To suit different activities the Desk <strong>Lighting</strong>, Conference <strong>Lighting</strong> and Presentation <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

have to be dimmable. Therefore, the Light Regulation Factors (LRF) option has to be<br />

switched on.<br />

Enabling the LRF option<br />

• Select Project Options from the Data menu.<br />

• Select the General tab.<br />

In Miscellaneous box, check (cross) 'Use Light Regulation Factors'.<br />

• Click OK.<br />

Defining the Switching modes<br />

The following switching modes will be defined:<br />

• Desk <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

• Conference <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

• Presentation <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

• Select Switching Modes from Data menu.<br />

In the Switching Modes dialogue box, enter the names of the switching modes:<br />

• Enter Desk <strong>Lighting</strong>, then click New.<br />

• Enter Conference <strong>Lighting</strong>, then click New.<br />

• Enter Presentation <strong>Lighting</strong>, then click OK.<br />

1.10 Positioning Luminaires for the Task-, Conference- and<br />

Accent lighting<br />

1.10.1 Positioning individual luminaires<br />

• Select Individual Luminaires from the Data menu.<br />

• Select the Luminaires tab.<br />

<strong>Lighting</strong> for Conference Table (suspended mounted, direct + indirect)<br />

• Click New.<br />

• In the first row of the luminaire list, select or enter:<br />

Type (A, B, ...)<br />

TPH 601/128 MD<br />

(or select corresponding legend number (A,<br />

B, etc) placed before the luminaire type<br />

name as shown in the 'Type' column in the<br />

luminaire list).<br />

Quantity (Qty.) 1<br />

Position (Pos) X = 1.50, Y = 1.80, Z = 2.00<br />

Aiming Rot = 90, Tilt90 = 0.0, Tilt0 = 0.0<br />

Sym<br />

NONE<br />

Switching Mode (1, 2, ...)<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.13 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

/ LRF (%) Desk <strong>Lighting</strong> LRF 60<br />

Conference <strong>Lighting</strong> LRF 10<br />

<strong>Lighting</strong> for Bureau (suspended mounded, direct + indirect)<br />

• Click New.<br />

• In the second row of the luminaire list, select or enter:<br />

Type (A, B, ...) TPH 601/128 C7-60<br />

Quantity (Qty.) 1<br />

Position (Pos) X = 2.80, Y = -2.10, Z = 2.00<br />

Aiming Rot = 90, Tilt90 = 0.0, Tilt0 = 0.0<br />

Sym<br />

NONE<br />

Switching Mode (1, 2, ...)<br />

/ LRF (%) Desk <strong>Lighting</strong> LRF 100<br />

Uplighter<br />

• Click New.<br />

• In the third row of the luminaire list, select or enter:<br />

Type (A, B, ...) QFG 101/300<br />

Quantity (Qty.) 1<br />

Position (Pos) X = 3.90, Y = -3.00, Z = 1.80<br />

Aiming Rot = 45, Tilt90 = 180, Tilt0 = 0.0<br />

Sym<br />

NONE<br />

Switching Mode (1, 2, ...)<br />

/ LRF (%) Conference <strong>Lighting</strong> LRF 70<br />

Presentation <strong>Lighting</strong> LRF 40<br />

<strong>Lighting</strong> for Painting<br />

• Click New.<br />

• In the fourth row of the luminaire list, select or enter:<br />

Type (A, B, ...) MASTERLINE PLUS 50W 24D<br />

Quantity (Qty.) 1<br />

Position (Pos) X = 2.10, Y = -3.00, Z = 2.65<br />

Aiming Rot = 135, Tilt90 = 0.0, Tilt0 = -43<br />

Sym<br />

NONE<br />

Switching Mode (1, 2, ...)<br />

/ LRF (%) Conference <strong>Lighting</strong> LRF 100<br />

Presentation <strong>Lighting</strong> LRF 100<br />

• Click OK.<br />

( To show the direction aiming of the luminaire the Aiming Arrows in the 2D Project<br />

Overview have to be switched on.<br />

• Select Project Options from the Data menu.<br />

• Select the 2D View tab.<br />

In the Show box, check (cross) Aiming Arrows.<br />

• Click OK.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.14 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

1.10.2 Positioning arranged luminaires<br />

<strong>Lighting</strong> for the Bureau<br />

• Select Arranged Luminaires from the Data menu.<br />

• In the Arrangements dialogue box, click Add and select Block.<br />

• In the Arrangement tab, enter the name of the arrangement.<br />

Name<br />

Bureau<br />

In the Position A box, enter the position of the bottom left luminaire.<br />

Position<br />

X = 1.50 m, Y = -2.40 m, Z = 2.70 m<br />

In the Block Orientation box, enter<br />

Orientation Rot = 0.0, Tilt90 = 0.0, Tilt0 = 0.0<br />

In the Arrangement box, enter quantity and spacing of the luminaires.<br />

Number in AB: 2 Spacing in AB: 2.40 m<br />

Number in AC: 2 Spacing in AC: 2.40 m<br />

• Select the Luminaire Definition tab.<br />

In the Project Luminaire box, select:<br />

Type TBS 630/314 C7-60<br />

• Click Apply.<br />

In the Aiming Type box, enter:<br />

Rot 90.0<br />

• Click Apply.<br />

In the Switching Modes box check/enter:<br />

Desk <strong>Lighting</strong> LRF 100<br />

Conference <strong>Lighting</strong> LRF 40<br />

• Click Apply.<br />

( The dimensions of the luminaire and system ceiling are both<br />

0.60 m x 0.60 m. Therefore, this luminaire type can not be seen if the project is printed on a<br />

B/W printer.<br />

• Click OK.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.15 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

Conference <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Arrangement 1<br />

• In the Arrangements dialogue box, click Add and select Block.<br />

• In the Arrangement tab, enter the name of the arrangement.<br />

Name Conference Table 1<br />

In the Position A box, enter the position of the bottom left luminaire.<br />

Position<br />

X = 1.10 m, Y = 1.20 m, Z = 2.70 m<br />

In the Block Orientation box, enter<br />

Orientation Rot = 0.0, Tilt90 = 0.0, Tilt0 = 0.0<br />

In the Arrangement box, enter quantity and spacing of the luminaires.<br />

Number in AB: 2 Spacing in AB: 0.80 m<br />

Number in AC: 3 Spacing in AC: 0.60 m<br />

• Select the Luminaire Definition tab.<br />

In the Project Luminaire box, select:<br />

Type<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 35W 10D<br />

• Click Apply.<br />

In the Switching Modes box check/enter:<br />

Conference <strong>Lighting</strong> LRF 100<br />

Presentation <strong>Lighting</strong> LRF 70<br />

• Click Apply.<br />

• Click OK.<br />

Arrangement 2<br />

• In the Arrangements dialogue box, click Add and select Line.<br />

Select the Arrangement tab, enter:<br />

Name Conference Table 2<br />

In the Line box, enter the position and quantity of the luminaires:<br />

First<br />

X = 1.50 m, Y = 0.80 m, Z = 2.70 m<br />

Last<br />

X = 1.50 m, Y = 2.80 m, Z = 2.70 m<br />

Number of luminaires 2<br />

Spacing<br />

2.00 m<br />

Orientation Rot = 90.0, Tilt90 = 0.0<br />

• Select the Luminaire Definition tab.<br />

In the Project Luminaire box, enter:<br />

Type<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 35W 10D<br />

• Click Apply.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.16 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

In the Switching Modes box check/enter:<br />

Conference <strong>Lighting</strong> LRF 100<br />

Presentation <strong>Lighting</strong> LRF 70<br />

• Click Apply.<br />

• Click OK.<br />

Cupboard and Door <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

• In the Arrangements dialogue box, click Add and select Line.<br />

Select the Arrangement tab, enter:<br />

Name<br />

Cupboard and Door<br />

In the Line box, enter the position and quantity of the luminaires:<br />

First<br />

X = 3.90 m, Y = 0.60 m, Z = 2.70 m<br />

Last<br />

X = 3.90 m, Y = 3.00 m, Z = 2.70 m<br />

Number of luminaires 3<br />

Spacing<br />

1.20 m<br />

Orientation Rot = 90.0, Tilt90 = 0.0<br />

• Select the Luminaire Definition tab.<br />

In the Project Luminaire box, enter:<br />

Type FBS 145/118<br />

• Click Apply.<br />

In the Switching Modes box check/enter:<br />

Desk <strong>Lighting</strong> LRF 100<br />

Conference <strong>Lighting</strong> LRF 100<br />

• Click Apply.<br />

• Click OK.<br />

Curtain <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

• In the Arrangements dialogue box, click Add and select Line.<br />

• Select the Arrangement tab, enter:<br />

Name<br />

Curtain<br />

In the Line box, enter the position and quantity of the luminaires:<br />

First<br />

X = 0.30 m, Y = -3.00 m, Z = 2.70 m<br />

Last X = 0.30 m, Y = 3.00 m, Z = 2.70 m<br />

Number of luminaires 6<br />

Spacing<br />

1.20 m<br />

Orientation Rot = 90.0, Tilt90 = 0.0<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.17 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

• Select the Luminaire Definition tab.<br />

In the Project Luminaire box, enter:<br />

Type FBS 145/118<br />

• Click Apply.<br />

In the Switching Modes box, check/enter:<br />

Desk <strong>Lighting</strong> LRF 100<br />

Conference <strong>Lighting</strong> LRF 100<br />

• Click Apply.<br />

• Click OK.<br />

Whiteboard <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

• In the Arrangements dialogue box, click Add and select Line.<br />

Select the Arrangement tab, enter:<br />

Name<br />

Whiteboard<br />

In the Line box, enter the position and quantity of the luminaires:<br />

First<br />

X = 2.10 m, Y = 3.00 m, Z = 2.65 m<br />

Last<br />

X = 2.70 m, Y = 3.00 m, Z = 2.65 m<br />

Number of luminaires 2<br />

Spacing<br />

0.60 m<br />

Orientation Rot = 0.0, Tilt90 = 0.0<br />

• Select the Luminaire Definition tab.<br />

In the Project Luminaire box, enter:<br />

Type<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 50W 38D<br />

• Click Apply (if applicable).<br />

In the Aiming Type box, enter:<br />

Tilt0 -30.0<br />

• Click Apply.<br />

In the Switching Modes box, check/enter:<br />

Conference <strong>Lighting</strong> LRF 100<br />

• Click Apply.<br />

• Click OK, then Close.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.18 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

1.11 Defining the Calculations<br />

• Select Define from the Calculation menu.<br />

• Double click on 'Working Plane'.<br />

In the Change Calculation dialogue box, change:<br />

Name<br />

Working Plane<br />

Grid<br />

Working Plane<br />

Switching Mode Desk <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Calculation Type Plane Illuminance<br />

Result Type<br />

Total<br />

Direction Surface +N<br />

• Click OK.<br />

• Double click on 'Floor'.<br />

In the Change Calculation dialogue box, change:<br />

Name<br />

Floor<br />

Grid<br />

Floor<br />

Switching Mode Presentation <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Calculation Type Plane Illuminance<br />

Result Type<br />

Total<br />

Direction Surface +N<br />

• Click OK.<br />

• Double click on 'Curtain'.<br />

In the Change Calculation dialogue box, change:<br />

Name<br />

Curtain<br />

Grid<br />

Curtain<br />

Switching Mode Desk <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Calculation Type Plane Illuminance<br />

Result Type<br />

Total<br />

Direction Surface +N<br />

• Click OK.<br />

• Double click on 'Bureau'.<br />

In the Change Calculation dialogue box, change:<br />

Name<br />

Bureau<br />

Grid<br />

Bureau<br />

Switching Mode Desk <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Calculation Type Plane Illuminance<br />

Result Type<br />

Total<br />

Direction Surface +N<br />

• Click OK.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.19 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

• Double click on 'Conference Table'.<br />

In the Change Calculation dialogue box, change:<br />

Name<br />

Conference Table<br />

Grid<br />

Conference Table<br />

Switching Mode Conference <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Calculation Type Plane Illuminance<br />

Result Type<br />

Total<br />

Direction Surface +N<br />

• Click OK.<br />

• Click Duplicate.<br />

In the Add Calculation dialogue box, change:<br />

Name Conference Table 1<br />

Grid<br />

Conference Table<br />

Switching Mode Presentation <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Calculation Type Plane Illuminance<br />

Result Type<br />

Total<br />

Direction Surface +N<br />

• Click OK.<br />

• Double click on 'Painting'.<br />

In the Change Calculation dialogue box, change:<br />

Name<br />

Painting<br />

Grid<br />

Painting<br />

Switching Mode Conference <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Calculation Type Plane Illuminance<br />

Result Type<br />

Total<br />

Direction Surface +N<br />

• Click OK.<br />

• Double click on 'Whiteboard'.<br />

In the Change Calculation dialogue box, change:<br />

Name<br />

Whiteboard<br />

Grid<br />

Whiteboard Table<br />

Switching Mode Conference <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Calculation Type Plane Illuminance<br />

Result Type<br />

Total<br />

Direction Surface +N<br />

• Click OK, then Close.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.20 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

1.12 Defining the Calculation Presentation<br />

• Select Presentation from the Calculation menu.<br />

In the Include box, double click on the + or - sign to include (+) or exclude (-) a calculation.<br />

For this project all calculations have to be included (Working Plane, Floor, Curtain, Bureau,<br />

Conference Table, Painting and Whiteboard).<br />

In the Presentation Forms box, select in which presentation forms the calculation results will be<br />

presented. Select:<br />

• Graphical Table;<br />

• Filled Iso Contour.<br />

1.12.1 Set the options for calculation presentation of all Calculations<br />

• In the Calculation Presentation dialogue box, select a calculation, beginning at the top.<br />

• Click Options.<br />

( For vertical calculations 'Working Plane', 'Floor', 'Curtain', 'Bureau' and 'Conference<br />

Table' the Aiming Arrows, Connected Grid and Unconnected Grid do not have to be<br />

displayed in the calculation presentation.<br />

- For vertical calculations 'Painting' and 'Whiteboard' the Aiming Arrows, Connected Field,<br />

Unconnected Field and Unconnected Grid do not have to be displayed in the calculation<br />

presentation.<br />

• Select the General tab.<br />

In the Show box, disable (no cross):<br />

Aiming Arrows<br />

Aiming Arrows<br />

Connected Grid OR Connected Field<br />

Unconnected Grid<br />

Unconnected Field<br />

Unconnected Grid<br />

• Select the Scaling tab.<br />

In the Sizing box, select:<br />

Zoomed Relative to Grid<br />

Factor 1.000<br />

• Click OK.<br />

• Repeat the above steps for all remaining calculations.<br />

• Click OK to return to the Main View.<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.21 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 3<br />

My Third Project<br />

1.12.2 Report Setup<br />

• Select Setup from the Report menu.<br />

• Select the Components tab.<br />

In the Components box, select which components have to be included in the report. Include:<br />

• Title Page;<br />

• Table of Contents;<br />

• Top Project Overview;<br />

• Summary;<br />

• Luminaire Details;<br />

• Installation Data.<br />

In the Include box, double click on the + or - sign to include (+) or exclude (-) a calculation.<br />

For this project 'Working Plane', 'Floor', 'Curtain', 'Bureau', 'Conference Table', 'Painting' and<br />

'Whiteboard' have to be included.<br />

In the Presentation Forms box, select in which presentation forms the calculation results are<br />

presented. For all calculations, select:<br />

• Graphical Table;<br />

• Filled Iso Contour.<br />

• Click OK to return to the Main View.<br />

1.13 Printing the report<br />

( You can use Print Preview (see Report menu) to preview your report before printing it.<br />

• Select Print Report from the File menu or Report menu.<br />

• Click OK in the Print dialogue box to print the report.<br />

1.14 Saving the project<br />

• Select Save from the File menu to save the project (DIRECTOR_ROOM.CIN).<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- A3.22 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Appendix 4<br />

My First Project<br />

printed report<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


My First Design<br />

Example 1a<br />

Date: 27-04-1999<br />

Customer:<br />

P. Tan<br />

Designer:<br />

Description:<br />

T. Gielen<br />

General <strong>Lighting</strong> for my Office:<br />

Room Dimensions:<br />

Width 3.5 m<br />

Length 5.6 m<br />

Height 2.7 m<br />

The nominal values shown in this report are the result of precision calculations, based upon precisely positioned luminaires in a fixed<br />

relationship to each other and to the area under examination. In practice the values may vary due to tolerances on luminaires, luminaire<br />

positioning, reflection properties and electrical supply.<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

<strong>Lighting</strong> Design and Application Centre<br />

LiDAC Central, Building ED-2<br />

P.O. Box 80020<br />

5600 JM Eindhoven<br />

Telephone: + 31 40 2758472<br />

Fax: + 31 40 2756406<br />

Telex: 35000 phtc nl<br />

E-Mail: lidac@nl.cis.philips.com<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a


My First Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1a Date: 27-04-1999<br />

Table of Contents<br />

1. Project Description 3<br />

1.1 Top Project Overview 3<br />

2. Summary 4<br />

2.1 Room Summary 4<br />

2.2 Project Luminaires 4<br />

2.3 Calculation Results 4<br />

3. Calculation Results 5<br />

3.1 Working Plane: Textual Table 5<br />

3.2 Working Plane: Iso Contour 6<br />

3.3 Working Plane: Filled Iso Contour 7<br />

4. Luminaire Details 8<br />

4.1 Project Luminaires 8<br />

5. Installation Data 9<br />

5.1 Legends 9<br />

5.2 Luminaire Positioning and Orientation 9<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 2/9


My First Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1a Date: 27-04-1999<br />

1. Project Description<br />

1.1 Top Project Overview<br />

Y(m)<br />

-0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.5<br />

A<br />

A<br />

A<br />

A<br />

-1.5 -0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5<br />

X(m)<br />

A : TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

Width<br />

3.50 m<br />

Length<br />

5.60 m<br />

Height<br />

2.70 m<br />

Working Plane Height<br />

0.80 m<br />

Scale<br />

1:40<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 3/9


My First Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1a Date: 27-04-1999<br />

2. Summary<br />

2.1 Room Summary<br />

Room Dimensions<br />

Width 3.50 m<br />

Length 5.60 m<br />

Height 2.70 m<br />

Working Plane Height 0.80 m<br />

Room Position (Front Bottom Left)<br />

X 0.00 m<br />

Y 0.00 m<br />

Total Average Room Surface Luminance (cd/m2):<br />

Ceiling<br />

4.8<br />

Left<br />

10.6<br />

Right<br />

10.7<br />

Front<br />

9.0<br />

Back<br />

9.0<br />

Surface<br />

Reflectance<br />

Ceiling 0.50<br />

Left Wall 0.30<br />

Right Wall 0.30<br />

Front Wall 0.30<br />

Back Wall 0.30<br />

Floor 0.10<br />

Floor<br />

9.0<br />

The overall maintenance factor used for this project is 0.80.<br />

2.2 Project Luminaires<br />

Code<br />

A<br />

Qty<br />

4<br />

Luminaire Type<br />

TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

Lamp Type<br />

1 * TL5 35W HE<br />

Power (W)<br />

40.0<br />

Flux (lm)<br />

1 * 3650<br />

The total installed power: 0.16 (kWatt)<br />

Number of Luminaires Per Arrangement:<br />

Luminaire<br />

Arrangement<br />

Code<br />

A<br />

Room Block<br />

4<br />

Power (kWatt)<br />

0.16<br />

2.3 Calculation Results<br />

(Il)luminance Calculations:<br />

Calculation<br />

Type<br />

Working Plane Surface Illuminance<br />

Unit<br />

lux<br />

Ave<br />

357<br />

Min/Ave<br />

0.59<br />

Min/Max<br />

0.46<br />

Result<br />

Total<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 4/9


My First Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1a Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3. Calculation Results<br />

3.1 Working Plane: Textual Table<br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Working Plane at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

X (m) 0.25 0.75 1.25 1.75 2.25 2.75 3.25<br />

Y (m)<br />

5.37 211< 273 307 311 307 274 213<br />

4.90 267 352 390 393 390 354 270<br />

4.44 289 387 419 415 419 388 292<br />

3.97 292 391 424 418 424 393 295<br />

3.50 293 387 430 432 430 389 295<br />

3.03 307 403 453 463> 454 405 309<br />

2.57 307 403 453 463> 454 405 309<br />

2.10 293 387 430 432 430 389 295<br />

1.63 292 391 424 418 424 393 295<br />

1.16 289 387 419 415 419 388 292<br />

0.70 267 352 390 393 390 354 270<br />

0.23 211 273 307 311 307 274 213<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

357 0.59 0.46 0.80<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 5/9


300<br />

My First Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1a Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.2 Working Plane: Iso Contour<br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Working Plane at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

300<br />

350<br />

Y(m)<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5<br />

250<br />

250<br />

300<br />

350<br />

400<br />

A<br />

A<br />

350<br />

450<br />

400<br />

400<br />

300<br />

A<br />

A<br />

350<br />

250<br />

250<br />

-1.5 -0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5<br />

X(m)<br />

A : TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

357 0.59 0.46 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:40<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 6/9


My First Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1a Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.3 Working Plane: Filled Iso Contour<br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Working Plane at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Y(m)<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5<br />

A<br />

A<br />

A<br />

A<br />

400<br />

300<br />

450<br />

350<br />

250<br />

-0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5<br />

X(m)<br />

A : TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

357 0.59 0.46 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:40<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 7/9


My First Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1a Date: 27-04-1999<br />

4. Luminaire Details<br />

4.1 Project Luminaires<br />

TBS 600/135 C7-60 1 x TL5 35W HE / 840<br />

Light output ratios<br />

DLOR : 0.76<br />

ULOR : 0.00<br />

TLOR : 0.76<br />

Ballast<br />

: Electronic<br />

Lamp flux<br />

: 3650 lm<br />

Luminaire wattage<br />

: 40.0 W<br />

Measurement code<br />

: LVW1067900<br />

Luminous Intensity Diagram (candela/1000 lumen)<br />

120 o 150 o 180 o 150 o 120 o<br />

90 o 90 o<br />

60 o 60 o<br />

250<br />

30 o<br />

0 o 30 o<br />

C = 180 o<br />

C = 270 o Imax C = 0 o<br />

C = 90 o<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 8/9


My First Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1a Date: 27-04-1999<br />

5. Installation Data<br />

5.1 Legends<br />

Project Luminaires:<br />

Code<br />

Qty<br />

Luminaire Type<br />

A<br />

4 TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

Lamp Type<br />

1 * TL5 35W HE<br />

Flux (lm)<br />

1 * 3650<br />

5.2 Luminaire Positioning and Orientation<br />

Qty and<br />

Code<br />

X (m)<br />

Position<br />

Y (m)<br />

Z (m)<br />

Aiming Angles<br />

Rot.<br />

Tilt90<br />

Tilt0<br />

1 * A<br />

1 * A<br />

1 * A<br />

1 * A<br />

0.88<br />

0.88<br />

2.63<br />

2.63<br />

1.40<br />

4.20<br />

1.40<br />

4.20<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 9/9


Appendix 5<br />

My Second Project<br />

printed report<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


My Second Design<br />

Example 1b<br />

Date: 27-04-1999<br />

Customer:<br />

P. Tan<br />

Designer:<br />

Description:<br />

T. Gielen<br />

General <strong>Lighting</strong> for my Office:<br />

Room Dimensions:<br />

Width 3.5 m<br />

Length 5.6 m<br />

Height 2.7 m<br />

Additional Task-and Accent <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

The nominal values shown in this report are the result of precision calculations, based upon precisely positioned luminaires in a fixed<br />

relationship to each other and to the area under examination. In practice the values may vary due to tolerances on luminaires, luminaire<br />

positioning, reflection properties and electrical supply.<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

<strong>Lighting</strong> Design and Application Centre<br />

LiDAC Central, Building ED-2<br />

P.O. Box 80020<br />

5600 JM Eindhoven<br />

Telephone: + 31 40 2758472<br />

Fax: + 31 40 2756406<br />

Telex: 35000 phtc nl<br />

E-Mail: lidac@nl.cis.philips.com<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a


My Second Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1b Date: 27-04-1999<br />

Table of Contents<br />

1. Project Description 3<br />

1.1 Top Project Overview 3<br />

2. Summary 4<br />

2.1 Room Summary 4<br />

2.2 Project Luminaires 4<br />

2.3 Calculation Results 5<br />

3. Calculation Results 6<br />

3.1 Working Plane: Graphical Table 6<br />

3.2 Working Plane: Iso Contour 7<br />

3.3 Working Plane: Filled Iso Contour 8<br />

3.4 Bureau: Graphical Table 9<br />

3.5 Bureau: Iso Contour 10<br />

3.6 Bureau: Filled Iso Contour 11<br />

3.7 Conference table: Graphical Table 12<br />

3.8 Conference table: Iso Contour 13<br />

3.9 Conference table: Filled Iso Contour 14<br />

3.10 Right wall: Graphical Table 15<br />

3.11 Right wall: Iso Contour 16<br />

3.12 Right wall: Filled Iso Contour 17<br />

4. Luminaire Details 18<br />

4.1 Project Luminaires 18<br />

5. Installation Data 19<br />

5.1 Legends 19<br />

5.2 Luminaire Positioning and Orientation 19<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 2/19


My Second Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1b Date: 27-04-1999<br />

1. Project Description<br />

1.1 Top Project Overview<br />

Y(m)<br />

-0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.5<br />

-1.5 -0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5<br />

X(m)<br />

TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 20W 24D<br />

(13672)<br />

Width<br />

3.50 m<br />

Length<br />

5.60 m<br />

Height<br />

2.70 m<br />

Working Plane Height<br />

0.80 m<br />

Scale<br />

1:40<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 3/19


My Second Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1b Date: 27-04-1999<br />

2. Summary<br />

2.1 Room Summary<br />

Room Dimensions<br />

Width 3.50 m<br />

Length 5.60 m<br />

Height 2.70 m<br />

Working Plane Height 0.80 m<br />

Room Position (Front Bottom Left)<br />

X 0.00 m<br />

Y 0.00 m<br />

Total Average Room Surface Luminance (cd/m2):<br />

Switching Mode<br />

General <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Bureau<br />

Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Table<br />

Accent <strong>Lighting</strong> Painting<br />

Ceiling<br />

5.0<br />

5.3<br />

5.3<br />

5.2<br />

Left<br />

10.2<br />

10.4<br />

10.4<br />

10.4<br />

Surface<br />

Reflectance<br />

Ceiling 0.50<br />

Left Wall 0.30<br />

Right Wall 0.30<br />

Front Wall 0.30<br />

Back Wall 0.30<br />

Floor 0.10<br />

Right<br />

10.3<br />

10.5<br />

10.6<br />

12.3<br />

Front<br />

9.1<br />

9.2<br />

9.2<br />

9.2<br />

Back<br />

14.3<br />

14.4<br />

14.4<br />

14.4<br />

Floor<br />

8.4<br />

9.6<br />

9.6<br />

8.5<br />

The overall maintenance factor used for this project is 0.80.<br />

2.2 Project Luminaires<br />

Code<br />

A<br />

B<br />

Qty<br />

4<br />

10<br />

Luminaire Type<br />

TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 20W 24D (13672)<br />

Lamp Type<br />

1 * TL5 35W HE<br />

1 * 12V 20W 24D<br />

Power (W)<br />

40.0<br />

20.0<br />

Flux (lm)<br />

1 * 3650<br />

1 * 305<br />

The total installed power: 0.36 (kWatt)<br />

Number of Luminaires Per Switching Mode:<br />

Switching Mode<br />

Luminaire Code<br />

A B<br />

General <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Bureau<br />

Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Table<br />

Accent <strong>Lighting</strong> Painting<br />

4<br />

4<br />

4<br />

4<br />

0<br />

4<br />

4<br />

2<br />

Power (kWatt)<br />

0.16<br />

0.24<br />

0.24<br />

0.20<br />

Number of Luminaires Per Arrangement:<br />

Arrangement<br />

Luminaire Code<br />

A B<br />

Bureau<br />

Conference table<br />

General<br />

Painting<br />

0<br />

0<br />

4<br />

0<br />

4<br />

4<br />

0<br />

2<br />

Power (kWatt)<br />

0.08<br />

0.08<br />

0.16<br />

0.04<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 4/19


My Second Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1b Date: 27-04-1999<br />

2.3 Calculation Results<br />

Switching Modes:<br />

Code<br />

Switching Mode<br />

1 General <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

2 Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Bureau<br />

3 Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Table<br />

4 Accent <strong>Lighting</strong> Painting<br />

(Il)luminance Calculations:<br />

Calculation<br />

Working Plane<br />

Bureau<br />

Conference table<br />

Right wall<br />

Switching<br />

Mode<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

Type<br />

Surface Illuminance<br />

Surface Illuminance<br />

Surface Illuminance<br />

Surface Illuminance<br />

Unit<br />

lux<br />

lux<br />

lux<br />

lux<br />

Ave<br />

331<br />

699<br />

716<br />

128<br />

Min/Ave<br />

0.60<br />

0.57<br />

0.55<br />

0.19<br />

Min/Max<br />

0.47<br />

0.40<br />

0.40<br />

0.05<br />

Result<br />

Total<br />

Total<br />

Total<br />

Total<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 5/19


My Second Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1b Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3. Calculation Results<br />

3.1 Working Plane: Graphical Table General <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Working Plane at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

284<br />

376<br />

411<br />

413<br />

412<br />

378<br />

286<br />

Y(m)<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5<br />

292<br />

290<br />

260<br />

212<br />

197<br />

226<br />

269<br />

288<br />

288<br />

267<br />

211<br />

392<br />

A<br />

387<br />

343<br />

277<br />

253<br />

292<br />

354<br />

387<br />

A<br />

387<br />

352<br />

273<br />

423<br />

419<br />

381<br />

315<br />

282<br />

329<br />

392<br />

419<br />

418<br />

390<br />

307<br />

421<br />

419<br />

385<br />

317<br />

293<br />

337<br />

396<br />

414<br />

414<br />

393<br />

311<br />

423<br />

419<br />

381<br />

315<br />

283<br />

329<br />

392<br />

419<br />

419<br />

390<br />

307<br />

393<br />

A<br />

388<br />

344<br />

278<br />

254<br />

293<br />

355<br />

388<br />

A<br />

388<br />

353<br />

274<br />

294<br />

292<br />

263<br />

213<br />

199<br />

228<br />

271<br />

291<br />

291<br />

269<br />

213<br />

-1.5 -0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5<br />

X(m)<br />

A : TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

331 0.60 0.47 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:40<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 6/19


My Second Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1b Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.2 Working Plane: Iso Contour General <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Working Plane at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

350<br />

Y(m)<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5<br />

250<br />

250<br />

200<br />

200<br />

300<br />

300<br />

350<br />

300<br />

A<br />

A<br />

400<br />

400<br />

A<br />

A<br />

350<br />

350<br />

300<br />

250<br />

300<br />

200<br />

250<br />

200<br />

-1.5 -0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5<br />

X(m)<br />

A : TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

331 0.60 0.47 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:40<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 7/19


My Second Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1b Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.3 Working Plane: Filled Iso Contour General <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Working Plane at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Y(m)<br />

0 1 2 3 4 5<br />

A<br />

A<br />

A<br />

A<br />

350<br />

250<br />

400<br />

300<br />

200<br />

-0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5<br />

X(m)<br />

A : TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

331 0.60 0.47 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:40<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 8/19


My Second Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1b Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.4 Bureau: Graphical Table Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Bureau<br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Bureau at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Y(m)<br />

2.9 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8<br />

A<br />

540<br />

695<br />

733<br />

644<br />

616<br />

647<br />

569<br />

401<br />

B<br />

B<br />

627<br />

908<br />

990<br />

821<br />

794<br />

905<br />

788<br />

495<br />

626<br />

908<br />

992<br />

821<br />

796<br />

906<br />

787<br />

499<br />

B<br />

B<br />

540<br />

694<br />

734<br />

645<br />

619<br />

648<br />

572<br />

404<br />

A<br />

0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7<br />

X(m)<br />

A : TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

B : MASTERLINE PLUS 20W 24D (13672)<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

699 0.57 0.40 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:12.5<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 9/19


My Second Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1b Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.5 Bureau: Iso Contour Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Bureau<br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Bureau at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Y(m)<br />

2.9 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8<br />

A<br />

700<br />

600<br />

B<br />

B<br />

500<br />

600<br />

800<br />

800<br />

700<br />

900<br />

900<br />

B<br />

B<br />

800<br />

700<br />

600<br />

A<br />

0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7<br />

X(m)<br />

A : TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

B : MASTERLINE PLUS 20W 24D (13672)<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

699 0.57 0.40 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:12.5<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 10/19


My Second Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1b Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.6 Bureau: Filled Iso Contour Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Bureau<br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Bureau at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Y(m)<br />

2.9 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8<br />

B<br />

B<br />

B<br />

B<br />

800<br />

600<br />

900<br />

700<br />

500<br />

1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4<br />

X(m)<br />

A : TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

B : MASTERLINE PLUS 20W 24D (13672)<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

699 0.57 0.40 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:12.5<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 11/19


My Second Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1b Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.7 Conference table: Graphical Table Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Table<br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Conference table at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Y(m)<br />

0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3<br />

534<br />

622<br />

622<br />

533<br />

689<br />

905<br />

905<br />

688<br />

B<br />

B<br />

740<br />

998<br />

998<br />

739<br />

671<br />

848<br />

848<br />

670<br />

655<br />

834<br />

A<br />

834<br />

655<br />

696<br />

956<br />

956<br />

695<br />

B<br />

B<br />

604<br />

820<br />

820<br />

604<br />

396<br />

485<br />

485<br />

396<br />

1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5<br />

X(m)<br />

A : TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

B : MASTERLINE PLUS 20W 24D (13672)<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

716 0.55 0.40 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:12.5<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 12/19


My Second Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1b Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.8 Conference table: Iso Contour Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Table<br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Conference table at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Y(m)<br />

0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3<br />

600<br />

600<br />

700<br />

B<br />

B<br />

800<br />

800<br />

900<br />

A<br />

700<br />

B<br />

900<br />

B<br />

700<br />

800<br />

600<br />

400<br />

500<br />

1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5<br />

X(m)<br />

A : TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

B : MASTERLINE PLUS 20W 24D (13672)<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

716 0.55 0.40 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:12.5<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 13/19


My Second Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1b Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.9 Conference table: Filled Iso Contour Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Table<br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Conference table at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

400<br />

600<br />

800<br />

500<br />

700<br />

900<br />

Y(m)<br />

0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1<br />

B<br />

B<br />

A<br />

B<br />

B<br />

1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5<br />

X(m)<br />

A : TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

B : MASTERLINE PLUS 20W 24D (13672)<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

716 0.55 0.40 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:12.5<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 14/19


My Second Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1b Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.10 Right wall: Graphical Table Accent <strong>Lighting</strong> Painting<br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Right wall at X = 3.50 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Z(m)<br />

-1.5 -0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5<br />

31<br />

80<br />

240<br />

164<br />

131<br />

113<br />

A<br />

28<br />

219<br />

268<br />

172<br />

133<br />

112<br />

27<br />

339<br />

532<br />

205<br />

134<br />

115<br />

B<br />

26<br />

70<br />

295<br />

168<br />

125<br />

119<br />

25<br />

94<br />

227<br />

121<br />

111<br />

123<br />

B<br />

25<br />

156<br />

265<br />

96<br />

107<br />

123<br />

25<br />

27<br />

67<br />

108<br />

110<br />

120<br />

25<br />

43<br />

201<br />

151<br />

122<br />

115<br />

24<br />

191<br />

259<br />

163<br />

127<br />

110<br />

A<br />

24<br />

189<br />

259<br />

163<br />

127<br />

108<br />

24<br />

43<br />

200<br />

150<br />

120<br />

107<br />

25<br />

28<br />

62<br />

103<br />

99<br />

97<br />

6 5 4 3 2 1 0<br />

Y(m)<br />

A : TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

B : MASTERLINE PLUS 20W 24D (13672)<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

128 0.19 0.05 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:40<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 15/19


My Second Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1b Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.11 Right wall: Iso Contour Accent <strong>Lighting</strong> Painting<br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Right wall at X = 3.50 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Z(m)<br />

-1.5 -0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5<br />

200<br />

A<br />

300<br />

500<br />

B<br />

100<br />

400<br />

200<br />

B<br />

100<br />

100<br />

A<br />

200<br />

100<br />

6 5 4 3 2 1 0<br />

Y(m)<br />

A : TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

B : MASTERLINE PLUS 20W 24D (13672)<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

128 0.19 0.05 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:40<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 16/19


My Second Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1b Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.12 Right wall: Filled Iso Contour Accent <strong>Lighting</strong> Painting<br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Right wall at X = 3.50 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

100<br />

300<br />

500<br />

200<br />

400<br />

Z(m)<br />

-0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5<br />

A<br />

B<br />

B<br />

A<br />

6 5 4 3 2 1 0<br />

Y(m)<br />

A : TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

B : MASTERLINE PLUS 20W 24D (13672)<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

128 0.19 0.05 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:40<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 17/19


My Second Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1b Date: 27-04-1999<br />

4. Luminaire Details<br />

4.1 Project Luminaires<br />

TBS 600/135 C7-60 1 x TL5 35W HE / 840<br />

Light output ratios<br />

DLOR : 0.76<br />

ULOR : 0.00<br />

TLOR : 0.76<br />

Ballast<br />

: Electronic<br />

Lamp flux<br />

: 3650 lm<br />

Luminaire wattage<br />

: 40.0 W<br />

Measurement code<br />

: LVW1067900<br />

Luminous Intensity Diagram (candela/1000 lumen)<br />

120 o 150 o 180 o 150 o 120 o<br />

90 o 90 o<br />

60 o 60 o<br />

250<br />

30 o<br />

0 o 30 o<br />

C = 180 o<br />

C = 270 o Imax C = 0 o<br />

C = 90 o<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 20W 24D (13672) 1 x 12V 20W 24D<br />

Light output ratios<br />

DLOR : 0.76<br />

ULOR : 0.00<br />

TLOR : 0.76<br />

Lamp flux<br />

: 305 lm<br />

Luminaire wattage<br />

: 20.0 W<br />

Measurement code : 9502091800<br />

Luminous<br />

120 o Intensity Diagram<br />

150 o 180 o<br />

(candela/1000<br />

150 o<br />

lumen)<br />

120 o<br />

90 o 90 o<br />

60 o 60 o<br />

3750<br />

30 o<br />

0 o 30 o<br />

C = 180 o<br />

C = 270 o Imax C = 0 o<br />

C = 90 o<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 18/19


My Second Design<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 1b Date: 27-04-1999<br />

5. Installation Data<br />

5.1 Legends<br />

Project Luminaires:<br />

Code<br />

A<br />

Qty<br />

4<br />

Luminaire Type<br />

B<br />

10<br />

TBS 600/135 C7-60<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 20W 24D (13672)<br />

Lamp Type<br />

1 * TL5 35W HE<br />

1 * 12V 20W 24D<br />

Flux (lm)<br />

1 * 3650<br />

1 * 305<br />

Switching Modes:<br />

Code<br />

Switching Mode<br />

1 General <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

2 Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Bureau<br />

3 Task <strong>Lighting</strong> Table<br />

4 Accent <strong>Lighting</strong> Painting<br />

5.2 Luminaire Positioning and Orientation<br />

Qty and<br />

Code<br />

X (m)<br />

Position<br />

Y (m)<br />

Z (m)<br />

Aiming Angles<br />

Rot.<br />

Tilt90<br />

Tilt0<br />

1<br />

Switching<br />

Modes<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

1 * A<br />

1 * A<br />

1 * B<br />

1 * B<br />

1 * B<br />

0.88<br />

0.88<br />

1.50<br />

1.50<br />

1.90<br />

1.40<br />

4.80<br />

3.50<br />

4.30<br />

3.50<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

+<br />

+<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

+<br />

+<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

1 * B<br />

1 * B<br />

1 * B<br />

1 * A<br />

1 * A<br />

1.90<br />

2.10<br />

2.10<br />

2.63<br />

2.63<br />

4.30<br />

1.20<br />

1.60<br />

1.40<br />

4.80<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

-<br />

-<br />

+<br />

+<br />

-<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

+<br />

+<br />

1 * B<br />

1 * B<br />

1 * B<br />

1 * B<br />

2.75<br />

2.75<br />

2.90<br />

2.90<br />

3.25<br />

4.25<br />

1.20<br />

1.60<br />

2.65<br />

2.65<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

40.00<br />

40.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

+<br />

-<br />

-<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 19/19


Appendix 6<br />

My Third Project<br />

printed report<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Director room<br />

Example 3<br />

Date: 27-04-1999<br />

Customer:<br />

P. Tan<br />

Designer:<br />

Description:<br />

T. Gielen<br />

Design for desk, conference and presentation<br />

lighting using light regulation factors (LRF)<br />

The nominal values shown in this report are the result of precision calculations, based upon precisely positioned luminaires in a fixed<br />

relationship to each other and to the area under examination. In practice the values may vary due to tolerances on luminaires, luminaire<br />

positioning, reflection properties and electrical supply.<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

<strong>Lighting</strong> Design and Application Centre<br />

LiDAC Central, Building ED-2<br />

P.O. Box 80020<br />

5600 JM Eindhoven<br />

Telephone: + 31 40 2758472<br />

Fax: + 31 40 2756406<br />

Telex: 35000 phtc nl<br />

E-Mail: lidac@nl.cis.philips.com<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

Table of Contents<br />

1. Project Description 3<br />

1.1 Top Project Overview 3<br />

2. Summary 4<br />

2.1 Room Summary 4<br />

2.2 Project Luminaires 4<br />

2.3 Calculation Results 5<br />

3. Calculation Results 6<br />

3.1 Working Plane: Graphical Table 6<br />

3.2 Working Plane: Filled Iso Contour 7<br />

3.3 Floor: Graphical Table 8<br />

3.4 Floor: Filled Iso Contour 9<br />

3.5 Curtain: Graphical Table 10<br />

3.6 Curtain: Filled Iso Contour 11<br />

3.7 Bureau: Graphical Table 12<br />

3.8 Bureau: Filled Iso Contour 13<br />

3.9 Conference Table: Graphical Table 14<br />

3.10 Conference Table: Filled Iso Contour 15<br />

3.11 Painting: Graphical Table 16<br />

3.12 Painting: Filled Iso Contour 17<br />

3.13 Whiteboard: Graphical Table 18<br />

3.14 Whiteboard: Filled Iso Contour 19<br />

3.15 Conference Table 1: Graphical Table 20<br />

3.16 Conference Table 1: Filled Iso Contour 21<br />

4. Luminaire Details 22<br />

4.1 Project Luminaires 22<br />

5. Installation Data 26<br />

5.1 Legends 26<br />

5.2 Luminaire Positioning and Orientation 26<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 2/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

1. Project Description<br />

1.1 Top Project Overview<br />

Y(m)<br />

-4.5 -3.5 -2.5 -1.5 -0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5<br />

D<br />

D<br />

D<br />

D<br />

D<br />

D<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

E<br />

C<br />

G<br />

G<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

A<br />

B<br />

A<br />

F<br />

D<br />

D<br />

D<br />

G<br />

G<br />

H<br />

-1.5 -0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.5 6.5<br />

X(m)<br />

Maximum of 6 luminaire types exceeded - discarding legend.<br />

Width<br />

4.70 m<br />

Length<br />

7.50 m<br />

Height<br />

2.70 m<br />

Working Plane Height<br />

0.80 m<br />

Scale<br />

1:50<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 3/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

2. Summary<br />

2.1 Room Summary<br />

Room Dimensions<br />

Width 4.70 m<br />

Length 7.50 m<br />

Height 2.70 m<br />

Working Plane Height 0.80 m<br />

Room Position (Front Bottom Left)<br />

X 0.00 m<br />

Y -3.75 m<br />

Total Average Room Surface Luminance (cd/m2):<br />

Switching Mode<br />

Desk <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Conference <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Presentation <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Ceiling<br />

13.3<br />

20.2<br />

9.2<br />

Left<br />

4.6<br />

4.3<br />

0.5<br />

Surface<br />

Reflectance<br />

Ceiling 0.70<br />

Left Wall 0.10<br />

Right Wall 0.30<br />

Front Wall 0.30<br />

Back Wall 0.30<br />

Floor 0.10<br />

Right<br />

12.0<br />

9.5<br />

1.8<br />

Front<br />

10.6<br />

13.0<br />

6.4<br />

Back<br />

6.3<br />

15.3<br />

1.2<br />

Floor<br />

10.7<br />

9.5<br />

2.2<br />

The overall maintenance factor used for this project is 0.80.<br />

2.2 Project Luminaires<br />

Code<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

E<br />

F<br />

G<br />

H<br />

Qty<br />

2<br />

1<br />

8<br />

9<br />

1<br />

1<br />

4<br />

1<br />

Luminaire Type<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 50W 38D (13678)<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 50W 24D (13674)<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 35W 10D (13764)<br />

FBS 145/118<br />

TPH 601/128 MD<br />

TPH 601/128 C7-60<br />

TBS 630/314 C7-60<br />

QFG 101/300<br />

Lamp Type<br />

1 * 12V 50W 38D<br />

1 * 12V 50W 24D<br />

1 * 12V 35W 10D<br />

1 * PL-C 18W<br />

1 * TL5 28W HE<br />

1 * TL5 28W HE<br />

3 * TL5 14W HE<br />

1 * T3 P S 300W<br />

Power (W)<br />

50.0<br />

50.0<br />

35.0<br />

24.0<br />

33.0<br />

33.0<br />

52.0<br />

300.0<br />

Flux (lm)<br />

1 * 1000<br />

1 * 1000<br />

1 * 620<br />

1 * 1200<br />

1 * 2900<br />

1 * 2900<br />

3 * 1350<br />

1 * 5600<br />

The total installed power: 1.22 (kWatt)<br />

Number of Luminaires Per Switching Mode:<br />

Switching Mode<br />

Desk <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Conference <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Presentation <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

A<br />

0<br />

2<br />

0<br />

B<br />

0<br />

1<br />

1<br />

C<br />

0<br />

8<br />

8<br />

Luminaire Code<br />

D E<br />

9 1<br />

9 1<br />

0 0<br />

F<br />

1<br />

0<br />

0<br />

G<br />

4<br />

4<br />

0<br />

H<br />

0<br />

1<br />

1<br />

Switching Mode<br />

Desk <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Conference <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Presentation <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Power (kWatt)<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

Number of Luminaires Per Arrangement:<br />

Arrangement<br />

Bureau<br />

A<br />

0<br />

B<br />

0<br />

C<br />

0<br />

Luminaire Code<br />

D E<br />

0 0<br />

F<br />

0<br />

G<br />

4<br />

H<br />

0<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 4/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

Arrangement<br />

Conference Table 1<br />

Conference Table 2<br />

Cupboard and Door<br />

Curtain<br />

Whiteboard<br />

Individuals<br />

A<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

2<br />

0<br />

B<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

1<br />

C<br />

6<br />

2<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

Luminaire Code<br />

D<br />

0<br />

0<br />

3<br />

6<br />

0<br />

0<br />

E<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

1<br />

F<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

1<br />

G<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

H<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

0<br />

1<br />

Arrangement<br />

Bureau<br />

Conference Table 1<br />

Conference Table 2<br />

Cupboard and Door<br />

Curtain<br />

Whiteboard<br />

Individuals<br />

Power (kWatt)<br />

0.21<br />

0.21<br />

0.07<br />

0.07<br />

0.14<br />

0.10<br />

0.42<br />

2.3 Calculation Results<br />

Switching Modes:<br />

Code<br />

Switching Mode<br />

1 Desk <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

2 Conference <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

3 Presentation <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

(Il)luminance Calculations:<br />

Calculation<br />

Working Plane<br />

Floor<br />

Curtain<br />

Bureau<br />

Conference Table<br />

Painting<br />

Whiteboard<br />

Conference Table 1<br />

Switching<br />

Mode<br />

1<br />

3<br />

1<br />

1<br />

2<br />

2<br />

2<br />

3<br />

Type<br />

Surface Illuminance<br />

Surface Illuminance<br />

Surface Illuminance<br />

Surface Illuminance<br />

Surface Illuminance<br />

Surface Illuminance<br />

Surface Illuminance<br />

Surface Illuminance<br />

Unit<br />

lux<br />

lux<br />

lux<br />

lux<br />

lux<br />

lux<br />

lux<br />

lux<br />

Ave<br />

375<br />

67.3<br />

143<br />

670<br />

1060<br />

40.9<br />

576<br />

584<br />

Min/Ave<br />

0.19<br />

0.14<br />

0.36<br />

0.73<br />

0.26<br />

1.00<br />

0.20<br />

0.15<br />

Min/Max<br />

0.10<br />

0.01<br />

0.26<br />

0.61<br />

0.13<br />

1.00<br />

0.12<br />

0.07<br />

Result<br />

Total<br />

Total<br />

Total<br />

Total<br />

Total<br />

Total<br />

Total<br />

Total<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 5/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3. Calculation Results<br />

3.1 Working Plane: Graphical Table Desk <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Working Plane at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Y(m)<br />

-5.5 -4.5 -3.5 -2.5 -1.5 -0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.5<br />

146<br />

245<br />

D<br />

283<br />

366<br />

D<br />

397<br />

473<br />

D<br />

483<br />

504<br />

D<br />

469<br />

495<br />

D<br />

457<br />

406<br />

D<br />

250<br />

122<br />

191<br />

250<br />

333<br />

388<br />

476<br />

528<br />

527<br />

492<br />

520<br />

504<br />

413<br />

261<br />

86<br />

125<br />

177<br />

242<br />

E<br />

315<br />

416<br />

489<br />

G<br />

466<br />

442<br />

501<br />

512<br />

G<br />

383<br />

230<br />

73<br />

105<br />

158<br />

243<br />

324<br />

435<br />

502<br />

505<br />

551<br />

689<br />

685<br />

484<br />

253<br />

86<br />

123<br />

176<br />

272<br />

378<br />

494<br />

548<br />

559<br />

604<br />

761<br />

F<br />

744<br />

514<br />

286<br />

118<br />

180<br />

231<br />

315<br />

395<br />

504<br />

536<br />

511<br />

539<br />

679<br />

675<br />

470<br />

248<br />

142<br />

234<br />

D<br />

266<br />

344<br />

D<br />

398<br />

507<br />

D<br />

508<br />

G<br />

432<br />

405<br />

500<br />

512<br />

G<br />

352<br />

197<br />

111<br />

167<br />

204<br />

269<br />

332<br />

418<br />

440<br />

398<br />

352<br />

371<br />

368<br />

291<br />

187<br />

-3.5 -2.5 -1.5 -0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8.5<br />

X(m)<br />

D : FBS 145/118<br />

E : TPH 601/128 MD<br />

F : TPH 601/128 C7-60<br />

G : TBS 630/314 C7-60<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

375 0.19 0.10 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:75<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 6/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.2 Working Plane: Filled Iso Contour Desk <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Working Plane at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Y(m)<br />

-4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3<br />

D<br />

D<br />

D<br />

D<br />

D<br />

D<br />

E<br />

G<br />

G<br />

F<br />

D<br />

D<br />

D<br />

G<br />

G<br />

600<br />

400<br />

200<br />

700<br />

500<br />

300<br />

100<br />

-0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5<br />

X(m)<br />

D : FBS 145/118<br />

E : TPH 601/128 MD<br />

F : TPH 601/128 C7-60<br />

G : TBS 630/314 C7-60<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

375 0.19 0.10 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:50<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 7/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.3 Floor: Graphical Table Presentation <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Floor at Z = 0.00 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

10<br />

11<br />

30<br />

26<br />

13<br />

13<br />

12<br />

12<br />

11<br />

11<br />

51<br />

349<br />

191<br />

37<br />

15<br />

14<br />

13<br />

12<br />

Y(m)<br />

-4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3<br />

21<br />

28<br />

29<br />

22<br />

14<br />

14<br />

14<br />

14<br />

14<br />

14<br />

14<br />

20<br />

32<br />

246<br />

242<br />

226<br />

195<br />

43<br />

16<br />

16<br />

16<br />

16<br />

16<br />

17<br />

17<br />

38<br />

C<br />

627<br />

C<br />

448<br />

C<br />

422<br />

C<br />

622<br />

C<br />

224<br />

29<br />

18<br />

18<br />

18<br />

18<br />

18<br />

19<br />

29<br />

790<br />

C<br />

617<br />

C<br />

557<br />

C<br />

604<br />

130<br />

28<br />

19<br />

19<br />

19<br />

19<br />

20<br />

20<br />

20<br />

B<br />

108<br />

118<br />

110<br />

96<br />

37<br />

19<br />

20<br />

20<br />

20<br />

20<br />

20<br />

20<br />

20<br />

16<br />

17<br />

18<br />

18<br />

19<br />

19<br />

19<br />

20<br />

20<br />

20<br />

20<br />

20<br />

20<br />

15<br />

16<br />

17<br />

18<br />

18<br />

18<br />

19<br />

19<br />

19<br />

19<br />

19<br />

19<br />

19<br />

14<br />

15<br />

16<br />

17<br />

17<br />

17<br />

17<br />

17<br />

17<br />

17<br />

18<br />

18<br />

H<br />

18<br />

13<br />

14<br />

14<br />

15<br />

15<br />

15<br />

16<br />

16<br />

16<br />

16<br />

15<br />

15<br />

16<br />

-1.5 -0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5 5.5 6.5<br />

X(m)<br />

B : MASTERLINE PLUS 50W 24D (13674)<br />

C : MASTERLINE PLUS 35W 10D (13764)<br />

H : QFG 101/300<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

67.3 0.14 0.01 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:50<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 8/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.4 Floor: Filled Iso Contour Presentation <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Floor at Z = 0.00 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Y(m)<br />

-4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

B<br />

H<br />

400<br />

600<br />

200<br />

-0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5<br />

X(m)<br />

B : MASTERLINE PLUS 50W 24D (13674)<br />

C : MASTERLINE PLUS 35W 10D (13764)<br />

H : QFG 101/300<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

67.3 0.14 0.01 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:50<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 9/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.5 Curtain: Graphical Table Desk <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Curtain at X = 0.00 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Z(m)<br />

-2.5 -1.5 -0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 4.5<br />

55<br />

194<br />

171<br />

124<br />

104<br />

119<br />

138<br />

137<br />

129<br />

119<br />

D<br />

56<br />

G<br />

56<br />

D<br />

57 57<br />

D<br />

57<br />

G<br />

57<br />

D<br />

57 56<br />

DE<br />

56 55<br />

D<br />

197 197 197 197 198 199 199 198 197 196<br />

181 182 182 182 184 185 186 184 183 182<br />

F<br />

141 143 140 140 146 148 146 144 142 139<br />

138 141 123 124 145 148 132 128 124 115<br />

176 179 146 147 184 188 151 132 120 102<br />

189 198 181 183 204 203 172 140 115 92<br />

179 194 191 193 200 193 167 139 110 84<br />

162 180 185 186 187 176 155 132 106 79<br />

147 163 171 172 169 159 141 122 101 78<br />

52<br />

191<br />

169<br />

122<br />

94<br />

80<br />

71<br />

64<br />

60<br />

59<br />

-4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4<br />

Y(m)<br />

D : FBS 145/118<br />

E : TPH 601/128 MD<br />

F : TPH 601/128 C7-60<br />

G : TBS 630/314 C7-60<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

143 0.36 0.26 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:50<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 10/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.6 Curtain: Filled Iso Contour Desk <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Curtain at X = 0.00 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

75<br />

125<br />

175<br />

100<br />

150<br />

200<br />

Z(m)<br />

-1.5 -0.5 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5<br />

D G D D G<br />

D DE<br />

D<br />

F<br />

-4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4<br />

Y(m)<br />

D : FBS 145/118<br />

E : TPH 601/128 MD<br />

F : TPH 601/128 C7-60<br />

G : TBS 630/314 C7-60<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

143 0.36 0.26 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:50<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 11/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.7 Bureau: Graphical Table Desk <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Bureau at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Y(m)<br />

-3.3 -3.2 -3.1 -3 -2.9 -2.8 -2.7 -2.6 -2.5 -2.4 -2.3 -2.2 -2.1 -2 -1.9 -1.8 -1.7 -1.6 -1.5 -1.4 -1.3 -1.2 -1.1 -1<br />

G<br />

581<br />

625<br />

668<br />

716<br />

747<br />

749<br />

713<br />

652<br />

580<br />

501<br />

601<br />

644<br />

703<br />

756<br />

797<br />

791<br />

743<br />

677<br />

597<br />

513<br />

604<br />

650<br />

700<br />

761<br />

803<br />

797<br />

744<br />

676<br />

599<br />

514<br />

F<br />

595<br />

638<br />

694<br />

751<br />

794<br />

789<br />

738<br />

668<br />

591<br />

505<br />

570<br />

616<br />

670<br />

726<br />

768<br />

770<br />

723<br />

654<br />

571<br />

488<br />

G<br />

1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9<br />

X(m)<br />

D : FBS 145/118<br />

E : TPH 601/128 MD<br />

F : TPH 601/128 C7-60<br />

G : TBS 630/314 C7-60<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

670 0.73 0.61 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:15<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 12/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.8 Bureau: Filled Iso Contour Desk <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Bureau at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Y(m)<br />

-3.3 -3.2 -3.1 -3 -2.9 -2.8 -2.7 -2.6 -2.5 -2.4 -2.3 -2.2 -2.1 -2 -1.9 -1.8 -1.7 -1.6 -1.5 -1.4 -1.3 -1.2 -1.1 -1<br />

F<br />

750<br />

650<br />

550<br />

800<br />

700<br />

600<br />

500<br />

1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6<br />

X(m)<br />

D : FBS 145/118<br />

E : TPH 601/128 MD<br />

F : TPH 601/128 C7-60<br />

G : TBS 630/314 C7-60<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

670 0.73 0.61 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:15<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 13/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.9 Conference Table: Graphical Table Conference <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Conference Table at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Y(m)<br />

0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1<br />

D<br />

D<br />

D<br />

324<br />

567<br />

1561<br />

1602<br />

855<br />

1641<br />

1651<br />

883<br />

1652<br />

1634<br />

664<br />

445<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

667<br />

864<br />

1337<br />

1302<br />

722<br />

1299<br />

1308<br />

750<br />

1351<br />

1409<br />

959<br />

785<br />

1874<br />

C<br />

1953<br />

745<br />

546<br />

453<br />

520<br />

E<br />

528<br />

481<br />

594<br />

815<br />

2047<br />

C<br />

1989<br />

630<br />

825<br />

1297<br />

1261<br />

679<br />

1256<br />

1265<br />

708<br />

1310<br />

1370<br />

920<br />

746<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

273<br />

491<br />

1483<br />

1523<br />

773<br />

1559<br />

1569<br />

805<br />

1576<br />

1560<br />

592<br />

374<br />

A<br />

A<br />

0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7<br />

X(m)<br />

Maximum of 6 luminaire types exceeded - discarding legend.<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

1060 0.26 0.13 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:15<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 14/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.10 Conference Table: Filled Iso Contour Conference <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Conference Table at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Y(m)<br />

0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

E<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

A<br />

2000<br />

1000<br />

1500<br />

500<br />

0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4<br />

X(m)<br />

Maximum of 6 luminaire types exceeded - discarding legend.<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

1060 0.26 0.13 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:15<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 15/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.11 Painting: Graphical Table Conference <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Painting at Y = -3.70 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Z(m)<br />

0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

41<br />

0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2<br />

X(m)<br />

Maximum of 6 luminaire types exceeded - discarding legend.<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

40.9 1.00 1.00 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:10<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 16/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.12 Painting: Filled Iso Contour Conference <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Painting at Y = -3.70 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

40.91<br />

40.92<br />

40.91<br />

40.92<br />

Z(m)<br />

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3<br />

0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2<br />

X(m)<br />

Maximum of 6 luminaire types exceeded - discarding legend.<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

40.9 1.00 1.00 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:10<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 17/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.13 Whiteboard: Graphical Table Conference <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Whiteboard at Y = 3.70 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Z(m)<br />

0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5<br />

125<br />

335<br />

515<br />

498<br />

442<br />

371<br />

309<br />

385<br />

805<br />

789<br />

689<br />

557<br />

451<br />

373<br />

526<br />

940<br />

884<br />

764<br />

674<br />

569<br />

468<br />

256<br />

687<br />

910<br />

901<br />

777<br />

639<br />

520<br />

254<br />

685<br />

908<br />

899<br />

776<br />

639<br />

520<br />

521<br />

934<br />

879<br />

760<br />

672<br />

569<br />

469<br />

377<br />

797<br />

783<br />

684<br />

554<br />

452<br />

375<br />

116<br />

329<br />

511<br />

495<br />

443<br />

373<br />

312<br />

1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2<br />

X(m)<br />

Maximum of 6 luminaire types exceeded - discarding legend.<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

576 0.20 0.12 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:10<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 18/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.14 Whiteboard: Filled Iso Contour Conference <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Whiteboard at Y = 3.70 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

200<br />

600<br />

400<br />

800<br />

Z(m)<br />

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2<br />

1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2<br />

X(m)<br />

Maximum of 6 luminaire types exceeded - discarding legend.<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

576 0.20 0.12 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:10<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 19/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.15 Conference Table 1: Graphical Table Presentation <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Conference Table at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Y(m)<br />

0.2 0.7 1.2 1.7 2.2 2.7 3.2<br />

87<br />

244<br />

926<br />

940<br />

403<br />

941<br />

941<br />

404<br />

942<br />

928<br />

247<br />

90<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

348<br />

475<br />

794<br />

755<br />

337<br />

731<br />

731<br />

338<br />

757<br />

796<br />

478<br />

352<br />

1211<br />

C<br />

1257<br />

400<br />

249<br />

174<br />

211<br />

212<br />

175<br />

251<br />

402<br />

1260<br />

C<br />

1215<br />

349<br />

476<br />

795<br />

756<br />

338<br />

732<br />

732<br />

339<br />

758<br />

797<br />

480<br />

354<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

89<br />

246<br />

928<br />

943<br />

405<br />

944<br />

944<br />

406<br />

944<br />

931<br />

250<br />

93<br />

0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3<br />

X(m)<br />

B : MASTERLINE PLUS 50W 24D (13674)<br />

C : MASTERLINE PLUS 35W 10D (13764)<br />

H : QFG 101/300<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

584 0.15 0.07 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:20<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 20/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

3.16 Conference Table 1: Filled Iso Contour Presentation <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

Grid<br />

Calculation<br />

Result Type<br />

: Conference Table at Z = 0.80 m<br />

: Surface Illuminance (lux)<br />

: Total<br />

Y(m)<br />

0.2 0.7 1.2 1.7 2.2 2.7 3.2<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

C<br />

1000<br />

500<br />

1250<br />

750<br />

250<br />

0.4 0.9 1.4 1.9 2.4<br />

X(m)<br />

B : MASTERLINE PLUS 50W 24D (13674)<br />

C : MASTERLINE PLUS 35W 10D (13764)<br />

H : QFG 101/300<br />

Average Min/Ave Min/Max Project maintenance factor<br />

584 0.15 0.07 0.80<br />

Scale<br />

1:20<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 21/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

4. Luminaire Details<br />

4.1 Project Luminaires<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 50W 38D (13678) 1 x 12V 50W 38D<br />

Light output ratios<br />

DLOR : 0.76<br />

ULOR : 0.00<br />

TLOR : 0.76<br />

Lamp flux<br />

: 1000 lm<br />

Luminaire wattage<br />

: 50.0 W<br />

Measurement code : 9502090800<br />

Luminous<br />

120 o Intensity Diagram<br />

150 o 180 o<br />

(candela/1000<br />

150 o<br />

lumen)<br />

120 o<br />

90 o 90 o<br />

60 o 60 o<br />

1500<br />

30 o<br />

0 o 30 o<br />

C = 180 o<br />

C = 270 o Imax C = 0 o<br />

C = 90 o<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 50W 24D (13674) 1 x 12V 50W 24D<br />

Light output ratios<br />

DLOR : 0.75<br />

ULOR : 0.00<br />

TLOR : 0.75<br />

Lamp flux<br />

: 1000 lm<br />

Luminaire wattage<br />

: 50.0 W<br />

Measurement code : 9502091400<br />

Luminous<br />

120 o Intensity Diagram<br />

150 o 180 o<br />

(candela/1000<br />

150 o<br />

lumen)<br />

120 o<br />

90 o 90 o<br />

60 o 60 o<br />

3750<br />

30 o<br />

0 o 30 o<br />

C = 180 o<br />

C = 270 o Imax C = 0 o<br />

C = 90 o<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 22/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 35W 10D (13764) 1 x 12V 35W 10D<br />

Light output ratios<br />

DLOR : 0.68<br />

ULOR : 0.00<br />

TLOR : 0.68<br />

Lamp flux<br />

: 620 lm<br />

Luminaire wattage<br />

: 35.0 W<br />

Measurement code : 9502092100<br />

Luminous<br />

120 o Intensity Diagram<br />

150 o 180 o<br />

(candela/1000<br />

150 o<br />

lumen)<br />

120 o<br />

90 o 90 o<br />

60 o 60 o<br />

15000<br />

30 o<br />

0 o 30 o<br />

C = 180 o<br />

C = 270 o Imax C = 0 o<br />

C = 90 o<br />

FBS 145/118 1 x PL-C 18W / 840<br />

Light output ratios<br />

DLOR : 0.59<br />

ULOR : 0.00<br />

TLOR : 0.59<br />

Ballast<br />

: Standard<br />

Lamp flux<br />

: 1200 lm<br />

Luminaire wattage<br />

: 24.0 W<br />

Measurement code<br />

: DL36012000<br />

Luminous Intensity Diagram (candela/1000 lumen)<br />

120 o 150 o 180 o 150 o 120 o<br />

90 o 90 o<br />

60 o 60 o<br />

375<br />

30 o<br />

0 o 30 o<br />

C = 180 o<br />

C = 270 o Imax C = 0 o<br />

C = 90 o<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 23/27


Director room<br />

TPH 601/128 MD 1 x TL5 28W HE / 840<br />

Light output ratios<br />

DLOR : 0.46<br />

ULOR : 0.43<br />

TLOR : 0.89<br />

Ballast<br />

: Electronic<br />

Lamp flux<br />

: 2900 lm<br />

Luminaire wattage<br />

: 33.0 W<br />

Measurement code<br />

: LVW1086500<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

Luminous Intensity<br />

150 o Diagram<br />

180 o<br />

(candela/1000<br />

150 o<br />

lumen)<br />

120 o 120 o<br />

90 o 90 o<br />

60 o 60 o<br />

200<br />

30 o<br />

0 o 30 o<br />

C = 180 o Imax C = 0 o<br />

C = 270 o C = 90 o<br />

TPH 601/128 C7-60 1 x TL5 28W HE / 840<br />

Light output ratios<br />

DLOR : 0.42<br />

ULOR : 0.47<br />

TLOR : 0.89<br />

Ballast<br />

: Electronic<br />

Lamp flux<br />

: 2900 lm<br />

Luminaire wattage<br />

: 33.0 W<br />

Measurement code<br />

: LVW1087100<br />

Luminous Intensity<br />

150 o Diagram<br />

180 o<br />

(candela/1000<br />

150 o<br />

lumen)<br />

200<br />

120 o 120 o<br />

90 o 90 o<br />

60 o 60 o<br />

200<br />

30 o<br />

0 o 30 o<br />

C = 180 o<br />

C = 270 o Imax C = 0 o<br />

C = 90 o<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 24/27


Director room<br />

TBS 630/314 C7-60 3 x TL5 14W HE / 840<br />

Light output ratios<br />

DLOR : 0.73<br />

ULOR : 0.00<br />

TLOR : 0.73<br />

Ballast<br />

: Electronic<br />

Lamp flux<br />

: 1350 lm<br />

Luminaire wattage<br />

: 52.0 W<br />

Measurement code<br />

: LVW1067900<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

Luminous<br />

120 o Intensity Diagram<br />

150 o 180 o<br />

(candela/1000<br />

150 o<br />

lumen)<br />

120 o<br />

90 o 90 o<br />

60 o 60 o<br />

250<br />

30 o<br />

0 o 30 o<br />

C = 180 o<br />

C = 270 o Imax C = 0 o<br />

C = 90 o<br />

QFG 101/300 1 x T3 P S 300W<br />

Light output ratios<br />

DLOR : 0.79<br />

ULOR : 0.00<br />

TLOR : 0.79<br />

Lamp flux<br />

: 5600 lm<br />

Luminaire wattage<br />

: 300.0 W<br />

Measurement code<br />

: LML2480100<br />

Luminous<br />

120 o Intensity Diagram<br />

150 o 180 o<br />

(candela/1000<br />

150 o<br />

lumen)<br />

120 o<br />

90 o 90 o<br />

60 o 60 o<br />

500<br />

30 o<br />

0 o 30 o<br />

C = 180 o<br />

C = 270 o Imax C = 0 o<br />

C = 90 o<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 25/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

5. Installation Data<br />

5.1 Legends<br />

Project Luminaires:<br />

Code<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

E<br />

F<br />

G<br />

Qty<br />

2<br />

1<br />

8<br />

9<br />

1<br />

1<br />

4<br />

Luminaire Type<br />

H<br />

1<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 50W 38D (13678)<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 50W 24D (13674)<br />

MASTERLINE PLUS 35W 10D (13764)<br />

FBS 145/118<br />

TPH 601/128 MD<br />

TPH 601/128 C7-60<br />

TBS 630/314 C7-60<br />

QFG 101/300<br />

Lamp Type<br />

1 * 12V 50W 38D<br />

1 * 12V 50W 24D<br />

1 * 12V 35W 10D<br />

1 * PL-C 18W<br />

1 * TL5 28W HE<br />

1 * TL5 28W HE<br />

3 * TL5 14W HE<br />

1 * T3 P S 300W<br />

Flux (lm)<br />

1 * 1000<br />

1 * 1000<br />

1 * 620<br />

1 * 1200<br />

1 * 2900<br />

1 * 2900<br />

3 * 1350<br />

1 * 5600<br />

Switching Modes:<br />

Code<br />

Switching Mode<br />

1 Desk <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

2 Conference <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

3 Presentation <strong>Lighting</strong><br />

5.2 Luminaire Positioning and Orientation<br />

Qty and<br />

Code<br />

X (m)<br />

Position<br />

Y (m)<br />

Z (m)<br />

Aiming Angles<br />

Rot.<br />

Tilt90<br />

Tilt0<br />

Switching<br />

Modes (%)<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

1 * D<br />

1 * D<br />

1 * D<br />

1 * D<br />

1 * D<br />

0.30<br />

0.30<br />

0.30<br />

0.30<br />

0.30<br />

-3.00<br />

-1.80<br />

-0.60<br />

0.60<br />

1.80<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

1 * D<br />

1 * C<br />

1 * C<br />

1 * C<br />

1 * G<br />

0.30<br />

1.10<br />

1.10<br />

1.10<br />

1.50<br />

3.00<br />

1.20<br />

1.80<br />

2.40<br />

-2.40<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

90.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

100<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

40<br />

-<br />

70<br />

70<br />

70<br />

-<br />

1 * G<br />

1 * C<br />

1 * E<br />

1 * C<br />

1 * C<br />

1.50<br />

1.50<br />

1.50<br />

1.50<br />

1.90<br />

0.00<br />

0.80<br />

1.80<br />

2.80<br />

1.20<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

90.00<br />

0.00<br />

90.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

100<br />

-<br />

60<br />

-<br />

-<br />

40<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

-<br />

70<br />

-<br />

70<br />

70<br />

1 * C<br />

1 * C<br />

1 * B<br />

1 * A<br />

1 * A<br />

1.90<br />

1.90<br />

2.10<br />

2.10<br />

2.70<br />

1.80<br />

2.40<br />

-3.00<br />

3.00<br />

3.00<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

2.65<br />

2.65<br />

2.65<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

135.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

-43.00<br />

-30.00<br />

-30.00<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

-<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

70<br />

70<br />

100<br />

-<br />

-<br />

1 * F<br />

1 * H<br />

1 * G<br />

1 * G<br />

2.80<br />

3.90<br />

3.90<br />

3.90<br />

-2.10<br />

-3.00<br />

-2.40<br />

0.00<br />

2.00<br />

1.80<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

90.00<br />

45.00<br />

90.00<br />

90.00<br />

0.00<br />

180.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

100<br />

-<br />

100<br />

100<br />

-<br />

70<br />

40<br />

40<br />

-<br />

40<br />

-<br />

-<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 26/27


Director room<br />

<strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V.<br />

Example 3 Date: 27-04-1999<br />

Qty and<br />

Code<br />

X (m)<br />

Position<br />

Y (m)<br />

Z (m)<br />

Aiming Angles<br />

Rot.<br />

Tilt90<br />

Tilt0<br />

Switching<br />

Modes (%)<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

1 * D<br />

3.90<br />

0.60<br />

2.70<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

100<br />

100<br />

-<br />

1 * D<br />

1 * D<br />

3.90<br />

3.90<br />

1.80<br />

3.00<br />

2.70<br />

2.70<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

0.00<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

100<br />

-<br />

-<br />

CalcuLuX <strong>Indoor</strong> 4.5a <strong>Philips</strong> <strong>Lighting</strong> B.V. Page: 27/27


Index<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Page<br />

A<br />

Aiming offset<br />

Floodlights...............................................................................................................................................3.15<br />

Aiming Type<br />

RBA Aiming............................................................................................................................................3.11<br />

Aiming Types ...............................................................................................................................................3.25<br />

XYZ Aiming............................................................................................................................................3.10<br />

Annual costs .................................................................................................................................................3.70<br />

Application Field<br />

Badminton Court .......................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

Basketball Court ........................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

Five-a-side football Pitch...........................................................................................................................3.6<br />

General Field .............................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

Handball Court...........................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

hockey Field ..............................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

Ice hockey Field.........................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

Korfball Court............................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

Squash Court..............................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

Table Tennis Table ....................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

Tennis Court ..............................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

Volleyball Court ........................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

Arc<br />

Shape .......................................................................................................................................................3.55<br />

Arrangement Definition<br />

Block Arrangement..................................................................................................................................3.23<br />

Free Arrangement ....................................................................................................................................3.34<br />

Line Arrangement....................................................................................................................................3.30<br />

Polar Arrangement...................................................................................................................................3.26<br />

Room Block Arrangement .......................................................................................................................3.20<br />

ASCII data file................................................................................................................................................3.8<br />

B<br />

Badminton Court ............................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

Basketball Court .............................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

Block Arrangement.......................................................................................................................................3.23<br />

C<br />

Calculation<br />

Calculation points ....................................................................................................................................3.45<br />

Calculation Grids.....................................................................................................................................1.3, 3.7<br />

Calculation points in a grid...........................................................................................................................3.45<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> <strong>Indoor</strong> .........................................................................................................................................1.1<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong> standard grids.................................................................................................................................3.40<br />

C-Gamma-System...........................................................................................................................................3.9<br />

CIBSE.............................................................................................................................................................1.2<br />

CIBSE standard grids....................................................................................................................................3.42<br />

CIBSE, DIN, NEN........................................................................................................................................3.40<br />

CIBSE/TM14..................................................................................................................................................1.2<br />

Connections with calculation Grids ................................................................................................................3.7<br />

Conversion of Aiming types .........................................................................................................................3.13<br />

Convert into a Free Arrangement..................................................................................................................3.35<br />

Coordinates<br />

XYZ-coordinates .......................................................................................................................................3.9<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- Ι.1 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Cost Calculation<br />

Annual costs ............................................................................................................................................3.70<br />

Total Investment ......................................................................................................................................3.69<br />

Create reports..................................................................................................................................................1.4<br />

C-γ coordinate.................................................................................................................................................3.9<br />

D<br />

Database<br />

Luminaire Database ...................................................................................................................................3.8<br />

Default side...................................................................................................................................................3.46<br />

Depreciation Factor.......................................................................................................................................3.72<br />

Drawings.......................................................................................................................................................3.58<br />

E<br />

Environment settings and preferences ............................................................................................................2.3<br />

EULUMDAT..................................................................................................................................................1.2<br />

F<br />

Factor<br />

Depreciation Factor..................................................................................................................................3.72<br />

Lamp Lumen Depreciation Factor ...........................................................................................................3.72<br />

Lamp Maintenance Factor .......................................................................................................................3.72<br />

Lamp Survival Factor ..............................................................................................................................3.72<br />

Light Regulation Factor (LRF) ..................................................................................................................1.4<br />

Luminaire Type Maintenance Factor.......................................................................................................3.72<br />

Maintenance Factor..................................................................................................................................3.72<br />

New Value Factor....................................................................................................................................3.72<br />

Filled Iso Contour.........................................................................................................................................3.68<br />

Five-a-side football Pitch................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

Floodlights<br />

Aiming offset...........................................................................................................................................3.15<br />

Free Arrangement .........................................................................................................................................3.34<br />

G<br />

General Field ..................................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

Generated grids.............................................................................................................................................3.40<br />

Glare .............................................................................................................................................................3.62<br />

Graphical manipulation...................................................................................................................................1.3<br />

Graphical Table ............................................................................................................................................3.68<br />

Grid<br />

Calculation Grids.......................................................................................................................................1.3<br />

Calculation points in a grid......................................................................................................................3.45<br />

Default side..............................................................................................................................................3.46<br />

Normal vector of a grid............................................................................................................................3.50<br />

Size and position of a grid .......................................................................................................................3.43<br />

Grid Method<br />

CIBSE........................................................................................................................................................1.2<br />

H<br />

Handball Court................................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

hockey Field ...................................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- Ι.2 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


I<br />

Ice hockey Field..............................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

IES ..................................................................................................................................................................1.2<br />

Indirect contribution .....................................................................................................................................3.65<br />

Individual Luminaires...................................................................................................................................3.17<br />

Luminaire Definition ...............................................................................................................................3.17<br />

Installation ......................................................................................................................................................1.3<br />

Installation and operating platform .................................................................................................................1.5<br />

Investment ....................................................................................................................................................3.69<br />

Iso Contour ...................................................................................................................................................3.68<br />

K<br />

Korfball Court.................................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

L<br />

Lamp Lumen Depreciation Factor ................................................................................................................3.72<br />

Lamp Maintenance Factor ............................................................................................................................3.72<br />

Lamp Lumen Depreciation Factor ...........................................................................................................3.72<br />

Lamp Survival Factor ..............................................................................................................................3.72<br />

Lamp Survival Factor ...................................................................................................................................3.72<br />

Light Regulation Factor (LRF) ..............................................................................................................1.4, 3.57<br />

<strong>Lighting</strong> Control ......................................................................................................................................3.57<br />

<strong>Lighting</strong> control ............................................................................................................................................3.57<br />

<strong>Lighting</strong> Controls<br />

Light Regulation Factor (LRF) ..................................................................................................................1.4<br />

Light-technical Calculations .........................................................................................................................3.59<br />

Line Arrangement.........................................................................................................................................3.30<br />

LTLI ...............................................................................................................................................................1.2<br />

Luminaire<br />

Conversion of Aiming types ....................................................................................................................3.13<br />

Database.....................................................................................................................................................3.8<br />

Individual Luminaires..............................................................................................................................3.17<br />

Luminaire Arrangements .........................................................................................................................3.19<br />

Luminaire Data ..........................................................................................................................................3.8<br />

Luminaire data formats..............................................................................................................................1.2<br />

Luminaire orientation ..............................................................................................................................3.12<br />

Luminaire Quantity..................................................................................................................................3.16<br />

Positioning.................................................................................................................................................3.9<br />

Rotating .....................................................................................................................................................3.9<br />

Luminaire Arrangements .......................................................................................................................1.3, 3.19<br />

Block Arrangement..................................................................................................................................3.23<br />

Convert into a Free Arrangement.............................................................................................................3.35<br />

Free............................................................................................................................................................1.3<br />

Free Arrangement ....................................................................................................................................3.34<br />

Line............................................................................................................................................................1.3<br />

Line Arrangement....................................................................................................................................3.30<br />

Point Arrangement.....................................................................................................................................1.3<br />

Polar Arrangement............................................................................................................................1.3, 3.26<br />

Ungroup...................................................................................................................................................3.35<br />

Luminaire Data ...............................................................................................................................................3.8<br />

CIBSE/TM14......................................................................................................................................1.2, 3.8<br />

EULUMDAT......................................................................................................................................1.2, 3.8<br />

IES ......................................................................................................................................................1.2, 3.8<br />

LTLI ...................................................................................................................................................1.2, 3.8<br />

Phillum ......................................................................................................................................................1.1<br />

Luminaire data formats...................................................................................................................................1.2<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- Ι.3 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Luminaire definition<br />

Aiming Types ................................................................................................................................. 3.10, 3.25<br />

Number of Same ......................................................................................................................................3.25<br />

Project Luminaire Type .................................................................................................................. 3.17, 3.25<br />

Symmetry.................................................................................................................................................3.25<br />

Luminaire Definition<br />

Block Arrangement..................................................................................................................................3.25<br />

Free Arrangement ....................................................................................................................................3.34<br />

Line Arrangement....................................................................................................................................3.33<br />

Polar Arrangement...................................................................................................................................3.28<br />

Room Block Arrangement .......................................................................................................................3.22<br />

Luminaire Orientation...................................................................................................................................3.10<br />

Luminaire Photometric Data<br />

CIBSE/TM14.............................................................................................................................................1.2<br />

EULUMDAT......................................................................................................................................1.2, 3.8<br />

IES .............................................................................................................................................................1.2<br />

LTLI ...................................................................................................................................................1.2, 3.8<br />

Phillum ......................................................................................................................................................1.1<br />

Luminaire Quantity.......................................................................................................................................3.16<br />

Luminaire Type Maintenance Factor............................................................................................................3.72<br />

M<br />

Maintenance Factor<br />

Lamp Maintenance Factor .......................................................................................................................3.72<br />

Luminaire Type Maintenance Factor.......................................................................................................3.72<br />

Mountain Plot ...............................................................................................................................................3.68<br />

N<br />

NEN..............................................................................................................................................................3.40<br />

New Value Factor.........................................................................................................................................3.72<br />

Normal vector of a grid.................................................................................................................................3.50<br />

Number of Same ...........................................................................................................................................3.25<br />

P<br />

Phillum ...........................................................................................................................................................1.1<br />

Platform<br />

Operating platform.....................................................................................................................................1.5<br />

Polar Arrangement........................................................................................................................................3.26<br />

Polygon<br />

Shape .......................................................................................................................................................3.54<br />

Positionering luminaire..........................................................................................................................3.9, 3.16<br />

Positioning and Orientation<br />

Luminaire...................................................................................................................................................3.9<br />

Pre-defined shapes ........................................................................................................................................3.52<br />

Preferences......................................................................................................................................................2.3<br />

Presentation<br />

Calculation results....................................................................................................................................3.50<br />

Selecting Aiming Presentation types .......................................................................................................3.14<br />

Presentation formats .....................................................................................................................................3.68<br />

Filled Iso Contour....................................................................................................................................3.68<br />

Graphical Table .......................................................................................................................................3.68<br />

Iso Contour ..............................................................................................................................................3.68<br />

Mountain Plot ..........................................................................................................................................3.68<br />

Textual Table...........................................................................................................................................3.68<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- Ι.4 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


Project<br />

Project Information....................................................................................................................................3.1<br />

Project Luminaire Type .................................................................................................................. 3.17, 3.25<br />

Project overview ...............................................................................................................................1.4, 3.68<br />

Q<br />

Quality Figures .............................................................................................................................................3.67<br />

R<br />

RBA System .................................................................................................................................................3.11<br />

Rectangle<br />

Shape .......................................................................................................................................................3.53<br />

Report Setup .................................................................................................................................................3.68<br />

Reports<br />

Create reports.............................................................................................................................................1.4<br />

Right hand rule .............................................................................................................................................3.46<br />

Room Block Arrangement ............................................................................................................................3.20<br />

Rotating ..........................................................................................................................................................3.9<br />

Rotation (Rot) ...............................................................................................................................................3.11<br />

S<br />

Set of points<br />

Shape .......................................................................................................................................................3.53<br />

Settings ..................................................................................................................................................2.3, 3.25<br />

Shapes<br />

Arc ...........................................................................................................................................................3.55<br />

Polygon....................................................................................................................................................3.54<br />

Pre-defined shapes ...................................................................................................................................3.52<br />

Rectangle .................................................................................................................................................3.53<br />

Set of points.............................................................................................................................................3.53<br />

Symmetry.................................................................................................................................................3.56<br />

User defined shapes .................................................................................................................................3.52<br />

Squash Court...................................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

Standards<br />

CIBSE.................................................................................................................................................1.2, 3.8<br />

NEN.........................................................................................................................................................3.40<br />

Switching Mode.....................................................................................................................................1.4, 3.25<br />

Symmetry......................................................................................................................................................3.25<br />

Shapes......................................................................................................................................................3.56<br />

X-Symmetry ............................................................................................................................................3.38<br />

XY-Symmetry..........................................................................................................................................3.39<br />

Y-Symmetry ............................................................................................................................................3.38<br />

Symmetry lighting installation........................................................................................................................1.3<br />

T<br />

Table Tennis Table .........................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

Tennis Court ...................................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

Textual Table................................................................................................................................................3.68<br />

Tilt0 ..............................................................................................................................................................3.12<br />

Tilt90 ............................................................................................................................................................3.12<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- Ι.5 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


U<br />

UGR<br />

Unified Glare Rating................................................................................................................................3.63<br />

User defined grids.........................................................................................................................................3.43<br />

User defined shapes ......................................................................................................................................3.52<br />

Utilisation Factor (UF)..................................................................................................................................3.66<br />

V<br />

Vignette files...................................................................................................................................................3.1<br />

Volleyball Court .............................................................................................................................................3.6<br />

X<br />

X-Symmetry<br />

Luminaires ...............................................................................................................................................3.38<br />

XY-Symmetry<br />

Luminaires ...............................................................................................................................................3.39<br />

XYZ aiming..................................................................................................................................................3.10<br />

XYZ-coordinates ............................................................................................................................................3.9<br />

Y<br />

Y-Symmetry<br />

Luminaires ...............................................................................................................................................3.38<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

- Ι.6 -<br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>


LiDAC Central<br />

<strong>Lighting</strong> Design and Application Centre<br />

P.O. Box 80020<br />

5600 JM Eindhoven<br />

The Netherlands<br />

http://www.lightingsoftware.philips.com<br />

<strong>Calculux</strong><br />

<strong>Indoor</strong>

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!